Home

User`s Manual (English)

1. Min Distance Set 2 Set the color of the second set point when measuring minimum distance 172 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Section Highlight Option Description Edges Set the color for the section edges when defining Section Cut Options Fill Set the fill color when defining Section Cut Options Geometry Highlight Option Description Vertex Set the color for vertices when highlighted during measurement and markup Face Set the color for faces when highlighted during measurement and markup Edge Set the color for edges when highlighted during measurement and markup Configuring Background With the Background options you can select a gradient or an image to display in the back ground From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Background The Back ground Gradient and Background Images options appear For the Background Gradient option Select either Plain Directional Gradient or Radial Gradient The background is previewed to the rights of the options For the Background Images option This feature adds a single or multiple background images to the workspace TASK 1 Click Add STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears 173 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES 2 Click on the ellipses to the right of the Image File field to browse to the image file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only select bm
2. 235 MARKUPS ADDING A NOTE From the Text Box Visibility list select OFF 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To undo repeat steps 1 through 4 except select ON STEP RESULT The dialog closes and the text box is hidden Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol 3 Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occurrence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip NOTE When creating multiple Note entities it is possible to group the entities Once the Note entities are grouped clicking on the group opens the last Note created TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note 2 Click a point on the document where you want to insert the note STEP RESULT The Note dialog appears Enter the text that you want in the applet 4 From the File menu select Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears To change the default font select Font and the type of font 6 Close the Note dialog STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree 7 Right click outside the note area to complete
3. 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas click Add 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result click Subtract ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 10 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 11 Right click to complete the measurement 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape STEPRESULT The shape is highlighted and the area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 53 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Angle in non Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure eal STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab Select a unit of measurement from the Units list 4 Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Cli
4. sssssssssssssecseesssssssseosceessessnsssoseeesees 167 Configuring AutoVue for 2D Fil S s sseessssssssseeseessessssssesseeeseesnsssesseecseeosssssssseeseeesresssssesseersresssssssseeesees 167 Spa pSettiNg Ssss rrasns roeiers eaei aeea ean Eaei Iaoa a aois aae aaiae SaR E Eaa 168 Overlays Extents Settings nissa O N S E A OTRS 168 COMMOUNIAG E E0 EAEE RETES EA 168 Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files essessessssssessscsscsssssscssscsscsussaccssssscssscsscsnscsscsuseacessesscsuscascansenceseenses 169 Rendering s iviskadinwan ii E EE A EA E KRAE E AA EE AT REE 169 Dynamic Rendering sssessssssesssssssssssssssnssssssssssssssessessesseesensensseneeneeseseeseeseeseeseesereereereereereereeeeererrerreerersres 169 Frame Rates eE a iaae REA r vesney aaa E EE Ea Es 170 Optimized REnNd riN Orena nn eena e aeria EE a E E Enri 170 Mode a a Na a a hae a hae R 170 Loading A RAN A A eter 171 Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution sssssssssesseereereereereeeeeeteereereerserseereereereeresrrsrrsersrrssesessessessssssssssss 171 Initial Visibility sssr esemnnnonannna ae a vos co vue a A EER AER 171 PMi Initial Visibility ssassn nnnnnninenmnnannne e inaa RRETAN 171 PMI Filter Oae eaaiseniecssn Nevistenonesn heise nano ana EEEE S aa EEES Iis 172 G nfiguring Color renna an E T S 172 Configuring Backgrounds niea aa a eiia eea siiis 173 MIScellanGOus ennn o a N A eas Biel EA S 174 Configuring AutoVue for EDA Fil6 S essssssssssssseessssssss
5. 4 Navigate and select the directory to which you want to export the list Enter a file name the default name is fverinfo txt 6 Click Save STEP RESULT The list is exported to the specified file 16 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE 7 When you are finished viewing the file version information click Close 8 Click OK to exit the About dialog AutoVue Graphical User Interface This section introduces you to the basics of working with AutoVue s graphical user inter face GUI The following image displays the AutoVue GUI for a 3D drawing im File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Tools Options Window Help Markups va Markup Entity Author Last Modified A Page Layer F Untitled2 lt m gt Models Views Bookmarks AutoCad3D dw AutoCAD 2004 2006 118 pg 3 3 146220 bytes 2005 07 06 NOTE This is the default view of AutoVue If you are using a customized Auto Vue GUI file the menu items and toolbars may vary AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Menu Bar The menu bar is the main access to all the menu commands The selection of commands changes according to the tasks being accomplished by AutoVue Toolbars AutoVue has three toolbars Auto Vue toolbar Markup Properties toolbar and Markup Entity toolbar AutoVue Toolbar The Auto Vue toolbar displays below the menu bar when you open AutoVue It is the default toolb
6. RESULT The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is too small a flash box appears indicating the location of the high lighted entity in the workspace See Searching Using Entity Search Zooming to a Selected Entity To zoom to a selected entity perform the following steps TASK 1 If you selected an entity from the workspace or Navigation panel right click and select Zoom Selected 2 Ifyou selected an entity from the Entity Search dialog right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the selected entity in the workspace 64 WORKING WITH EDA FILES FILTERING ENTITY TYPES Filtering Entity Types With the Entity Filter option you can choose to display certain entity types while hiding others You can also limit the types of entities you can select in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Entity Filter STEP RESULT The Entity Filter dialog appears 2 Under the Visibility column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types you want to display in the workspace Deselect the check box to hide the entity types 3 Under the Selection column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types that you want to be able to select in the workspace Deselect the check box beside the e
7. STEP RESULT The measured line path cumulated measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The cumulated measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 7 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 212 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 2 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 o N DM A From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area From the Perimeter Units list
8. The default light setting consists of a white light at the 10 o clock position with respect to the model In the Lighting dialog it appears as a grey ball of white light at the 10 o clock position along the circumference of the larger sphere Ambient lighting is the overall lighting that surrounds an object It provides constant illu mination to every surface of the model This type of lighting is particularly effective as a fill light for surfaces not directly illuminated by a directional light source You can set the 113 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS intensity or source position too high a setting tends to saturate the image and reduce its clarity Using the Directional lighting option you can adjust the position of the light source on an object You can make the following modifications via the Lighting dialog Set the intensity and source position of the ambient light Set the direction of light Add and remove a light source Change light color brightness and specularity Setting Ambient Lighting TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears Click and drag the Ambient Light sliding bar until you achieve the desired lighting STEP RESULT The lighting automatically changes with the movement of the sliding bar The Custom option is selected when you modify the ambient light To set the ambient lighting to its defa
9. Ww walkthrough 157 watermarks 271 workspace 63 X XRef paths 165 298 298
10. Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Signoff Attaches a hyperlink as a markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink Ys See Adding a Hyperlink Creates an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A See Adding Signoff Entities Symbol Adds a symbol markup to the document From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol amp See Adding a Symbol 196 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Adding an Attachment In AutoVue you can attach a file of any type for example text audio or video as a markup entity The attachment is embedded into the markup entity and displays as an icon the display TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment S 2 Click on the drawing where you want to add an attachment STEP RESULT The Attach File dialog appears 3 Inthe Link Name field enter a name for the attachment Optionally you can also provide a brief description of the attachment in the Description box 4 Inthe URL field enter the path to the file or click Browse The File Open dialog appears 5 Select the file or click Browse and click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can attach any local file or any DMS file 6 From the
11. MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Are amp STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 5 From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance 6 From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 8 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 9 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for arc center coordinates radius
12. WORKING WITH EDA FILES NETs TAB Nets Tab NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets Nets Coone Name Parti User LOGI D14 No No proje A D13 No No proje D12 NO No proje Dil No No proje D10 NO No proje D1 N NO proje DO NO No proje CLRCNT NO No proje y lt i gt a Nodes on Net Name Net Pin Use Pads MN R5 2 CLK4 UNSPEC SMD50 1 U23 9 CLK4 IN SMD5O 1 U22 13 CLK4 OUT SMD50O 1 lt jii gt Components Nets Bookmarks i 61 WORKING WITH EDA FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks R Design 3D Model Com
13. Click and drag to draw a Cloud From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Cloud QO Circle Freestyle Click and drag to draw a circle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Circle g To draw a circle instead of an ellipse press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag Create freestyle entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle Ze See Adding a Freestyle Entity Highlight Click and drag to highlight a boxed area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Highlight A The highlighted box will be filled with a transparent color Leader Create leader entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leader ca See Adding a Leader Line Click and drag to draw a line From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Line A i To draw a line and force it to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes Measurement Create markup measure entities 2 From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance asf Area 2 Angle Arc A or Minimum Distance as k See Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities 207 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Markup E
14. RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layers list beside the Layers Control button amp on the AutoVue toolbar Deleting User Defined Layer Sets To delete a user defined layer set perform the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers Se STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens From the Layer Sets list select the user defined layer set you want to delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only delete user defined layer sets Click Delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The layer settings of the deleted layer set remain displayed on the screen until you select another layer set Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the Layers dialog 76 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MANIPULATING EDA VIEWS Saving User Defined Layers Sets with Markups You can save user defined layer sets using Markup files TASK 1 Create custom layer sets 2 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Markup amp Create any markup entities that you need 4 From the Markup menu select Save As STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 5 Enter the markup information and click OK to close the Save Markup File As dialog RESULT The Layer sets you created are saved with the Markup file When you reopen the file during
15. STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The Measured Distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 51 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 6 7 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Distance tab Area in non Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Area tab In the Area Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the area of the region In the Perimeter Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the perimeter of the region ADDITIONAL INF
16. Thickness and Default Component Height fields Reload the file to see your changes Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files When you compare files you can synchronize all layer settings When the layer settings are synchronized changing one setting changes the same setting for both files you are comparing 177 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES NOTE This option is selected by default and is only applicable for PCB drawings TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis 2 Select the Layer Settings option to synchronize all layer settings when comparing files Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing You can configure the zoom options when you cross probe files TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis 2 Select one of the following Cross Probe Action options a Select Keep Current Zoom Level When this option is active the view of the target files remains the same while you cross probe b Select Zoom Selected to automatically zoom in on selected entities while you cross probe This option is enabled by default c Select Zoom Fit to automatically adjust the contents of a file along the horizontal and vertical axis to fully display within the current window Modifying Colors You can configure the colors for EDA files From the tree expand EDA and then select Colors In the Color Options dialog the options that you can configure are
17. WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Markup Indicator icon does not display then the file you opened has no existing markups associated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears From the Markup list select the check box next to Markup file you want to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select more than one Markup file the Active Markup menu lets you select which one of them is initially active See Setting the Active Markup File for more information Click OK RESULT The selected markup or markups appear in the workspace on top of the original file NOTE When you select more than one Markup file the markups display simultaneously Saving an Existing Markup File To save a modified existing Markup file from the Markup menu select Save NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup id Ifyou have multiple markups open that you have modified and want to save them all from the Markup menu select Save All To save an existing markup as a new markup from the Markup menu select Save As Importing a Markup File To import a Markup file on top of the original file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From
18. _ lt To return to the entity properties displayed before you clicked the back arrow click the forward arrow _ gt _ Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Showing Net Connectivity You can view the net connectivity of an entity such as a pin via or trace with the Show Net Connectivity option NOTE Show Net Connectivity is disabled when more than one entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin via or trace from the workspace or the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding entity is highlighted in the workspace and in the Naviga tion Panel 2 From the View menu select Show Net Connectivity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the workspace or Navigation Panel you can also right click the selected entity and then select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The graphical entities belonging to the connected nets are highlighted Displaying the Entity Properties of a Net You can view the properties of a net via the Show Entity Properties option 67 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE The Show Entity Properties is disabled when more than one net entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin via or trace from the workspace or the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding netis highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel From the workspace or Navigation Panel right click the selected net and then select Show Entity
19. able list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home Adding a Watermark TASK 1 10 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Watermark tab Enter the Watermark Text that you want to appear on the file To insert a code in the watermark select a code from the Insert Code list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select Yn Total document pages the total number of pages for the selected file will appear in the Watermark You can insert more than one code To insert a system variable select a variable from the Insert Variable list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select browser version the version of the browser that the file is displayed in will appear in the Watermark ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can insert more than one system variable To set the orientation of the watermark click Diagonal Horizontal or Vertical To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears a From the Font list select the type of font b From the Size list select the size of font In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing 2
20. appears in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Arcin non Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and calculate its arc center radius diam eter and arc length TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Arc tab In the Arc Info section select a unit of measurement from the Length Units list in which to measure the length of the arc In the Measured Angle section select a unit of measurement from the Sweep Units list in which to measure the angle of the arc Click points on the drawing to define the arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Arcin Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center arc length start and end of angle sweep and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Arc tab 55 WORKING WITH 2D FILES M
21. double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip NOTE While editing a Note entity you can continue to make selections from the Auto Vue toolbar and menubar Clicking in the workspace saves the last modified state of the Note and closes the Note dialog When creating multiple Note entities it is possible to group the entities Once the Note entities are grouped clicking on the group opens the last Note created TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note STEP RESULT The Attach To dialog appears 2 Inthe Attach To dialog click the entity type that you want to attach the note to 3 Select the entity on the model that you want to attach a note to STEP RESULT The Note dialog appears 4 Enter the text that you want in the dialog From the File menu select Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears 6 To change the default font select Font and the type of font Close the Note dialog STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the entity and in the Markup Navigation Tree 8 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Whenever an entity is attached to a 3D model the anchor point the point at which the entity is attached is highlighted by a sm
22. if you want the section plane visible 7 Select Fill if you want the section plane filled ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The fill color can also be set from the Configuration dialog STEP RESULT The section plane is displayed as filled and the Section Area is calculated 8 From the Measured Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the section surface 9 Click Close to close the Define Section dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Once you have defined the section plane and closed the Define Section dialog among other options you can choose whether to enable remove or invert a defined section from the Section menu 133 WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Exploding You can use the Explode option to better understand the structure of an assembly and to analyze the dismount capability You can also save the exploded view as well as obtain a printed document of the exploded product for further analysis Explode Options From the Explode dialog you can define how the explosion is to be performed and to visu ally explode or implode a model The options that you can set are Option Description Maximum Depth Define up to which level you want to explode All entities from the root level to the specified level are exploded All entities on the other levels will not be exploded If you are exploding Whole model the number of available levels depends on how many explodable levels exist in the model For example
23. one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components RefDes Compon Loa C345 CAP 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CAP 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 C341 CAP 0402 1 si gt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF Liaw gt Components Nets Bookmarks Nets Tab NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets 21 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Allselected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets Nets customize _ Name Parti User LOGI D14 No No proje A D13 NO NO proje D12 NO No proje D11 NO NO proje D10 NO No proje D1 NO NO proje D0 NO NO proje CLRCNT NO NO proje y SS A lt i gt Nodes on Net Name Net Pin Use Pads WN R
24. select the unit in which you want to set the thickness In the Thickness field enter a thickness value Press the Enter key STEP RESULT The new thickness value appears beside the selected Color Index in the From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog To save the changes that you made click Save As STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Enter a file name for the new pen settings Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify an existing pen setting select the pen setting from the Current Pen Settings list make the changes then click Save STEP RESULT The new pen settings are saved and appear in the Current Pen Settings list Click OK to close the Pen Thickness dialog 282 CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS 283 Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions The following table presents commonly used EDA terms and their corresponding defini tions EDA Term Annular ring Definition A circular strip of conductive material that remains after a hole has been drilled through the pad of a printed circuit board Anti copper An area within a fill zone in which copper cannot be placed Aperture An opening similar to the aperture of a camera that is used for photo plotting Apertures are available in various sizes and shapes Aperture list A text file containing the dimensions for each of the apertures used to photo plot PCB artwork Clusters Components that are g
25. size offset and solder mask guard width PCB Printed Circuit Board A PCB is a board made up of components affixed to a common surface and connected by copper tracks Pin The portion of a component to which an electrical connection can be made Polarity Positive polarity refers to visible items Negative polarity refers to items that become transparent to reveal underlaying layers or background color Ratsnest A number of unrouted straight line connections between two or more pads that represent the electrical connections in the netlist The ratsnest serves as a reminder that the pads must be connected and that currently there is no track on the board to make that connection 287 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Reference designator Definition A character string denoting the type of component and a number that is specific to that component Routing Placing conductive interconnects between components on a PCB layout The process of turning nets into tracks Schematic A graphical description of an electrical circuit Segment The partial track that exists between two adjacent vertices or between a vertex and a pin Sometimes the track between two pins is also called a segment although connection is usually the more appropriate term here Signal An electrical impulse of a predetermined voltage current polarity and pulse width
26. the drawing 3 Click OK RESULT The drawing is displayed from the selected view point Analyzing 2D Vector Files With the analysis functionality you can measure entities compare two files or view drawing information These options are available under the Analysis menu The following table lists all the options from the Analysis menu 42 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Menu Sub Menu Description Measure Measure the distance area angle and arc of an entity From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click P See Also Measuring in 2D Files for more information Compare Compare two files See Comparing 2D Files for more information Show Drawing Information Select Single Entity Displays information for the selected entity See Also Viewing Details of a Single Entity for more information List Tags Attributes List block attributes and tags See Also Viewing Tags Attributes for more information Entity Information View information of a set of entities See Also Viewing Information for a Set of Entities for more information Comparing 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to visually compare two files and display color coded compar ative data Generally when comparing two files you should first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older version When comparing files AutoVue displays three
27. 15C9 20 Unclassed 44 EC1 11A3 20 Unclassed NET19 IC11 1 1C11 31 Unclassed Apply Filter s DATA Fra 2101113 Inelassed lt 90 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH Performing an Entity Type based Search The following steps describe how to perform an entity type based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the Entity Types tab 3 From the Entity Types list select an entity type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by attribute click the attribute column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT A list of attributes for the selected entity type appear 4 Ifyou want to search by attribute select an attribute from the Attribute list If you want to search by value select a value from the Value list 6 Click Add Filter STEP RESULT The selected attribute and its corresponding value appear in the list Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have all the filters you want 8 Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONALINFORMATION To remove a filter select the line in the list containing the attribute and value you do not want to use as a filter then click Remove Filter STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear showing the column headers for the entity s available attributes 9 To save
28. 2D files AutoVue provides the ability to access entity information access views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements AutoVue references various sources to obtain all data required to completely and accu rately display vector files These sources can be internal to the file like layers blocks and overlays or external reference files XRefs that are located outside the file Manipulating 2D Vector Files The Manipulate menu option allows you to manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can select which layers blocks and external reference files XRefs to display The Manipulate menu options are Menu Sub Menu Description Visibility Control Layers Select and display different layers of a drawing From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click 4 See Displaying Layers for more information Blocks Select and display a block from a drawing From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click w See Selecting Blocks for more information XRefs Select the XRefs to display in the drawing See Displaying XRefs for more information Overlays Select an overlay to modify See Adding an Overlay for more information 37 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Displaying Layers Use this option to configure the layers to display of the current active file TASK
29. 62 102 build information 16 bylayer 257 C cali brating distance 51 calibrating arc 56 99 154 215 226 233 244 calibrating distance 95 151 213 222 230 242 change color markup layer 192 Components tab 21 60 configure 162 2D 167 colors 168 snap settings 168 3D 169 align with current UCS 175 background 173 background gradient 173 background images 174 color 172 dynamic load mesh resolution 171 dynamic rendering 169 frame rate 170 geometry highlight 173 initial visibility 171 loading 171 miscellaneous 174 model 170 PMI filtering 172 PMI initial visibility 171 rendering 169 section highlight 173 selection 175 show global axes 174 tree level 175 base font 167 CAD file options 163 common 172 178 desktop office 181 EDA 176 3D PCB view 177 3D view 179 colors 178 cross probing 178 dim unselected 176 highlight entity 176 synchronize layers 178 thicken highlighted entity 176 tooltips 177 font paths 166 general options 163 graphic files 180 measurement 166 paths 165 raster files 164 rendering 164 resources 164 XRef paths 165 convert 278 file 281 options 278 PDF 280 pen settings 281 size 280 create markup layer 191 cross probing 78 80 net connectivity 81 two or more EDA files 78 zoom behavior 178 zooming 81 custom color 262 custom line color 259 custom line thickness 260 D delete 294 markup layer 194 markups 253 design verification 84 88 design rule checks 84 exporting results 89 d
30. Custom Color Z STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears 2 Select a color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color Markup Layers You can move selected markup entities to a specific layer the markup entities will inherit the properties of the layer TASK 1 From the Markup Layer list select the layer you want to make active 2 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The selected layer appears in the workspace See Setting the Active Markup Layer 262 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Leader Alignment With the Leader markup entity you can adjust the location of the leader line s anchor point to the text box The Leader Alignment list has the following option for anchor point loca tion with respect to the text box Top Left Top Center Top Right Center Left Center Center Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right Text Box Visibility You can choose to hide the surrounding box for the Leader Text and 3D Text markup enti ties 263 Printing With AutoVue you can print and preview files Files can be printed on their own or with associated markups and overlays You can also c
31. ENTITY SEARCH Searching Using Entity Search You can search for an entity in a schematic drawing or a PCB design using the Entity Search option To filter entities apply attribute or entity type filters as search criteria You can select entities from the results list to highlight them in the workspace and the Navigation Panel You can also export the search results to a csv file NOTE If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the high lighted entity in the workspace To open the Entity Search dialog from the Edit menu select Entity Search From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp If your schematic has multiple pages a Defining Scope dialog appears Defining Scope Scope Current Schematic Page Entire Schematic Design Select Current Schematic Page to browse through only one page Select Entire Schematic Design to browse through all schematic pages Click OK after making your selection The Entity Search dialog appears Entity Search Entity Types Attributes Attribute Name v Add Filter Value E v Attribute Value Entity Types Net Name Pin List Net Class 38 EC1 81C12 41 Unclassed 5 109 51012 8 Unclassed 6 1 9 21012 11 Unclassed 15 1 5 21017 101 Unelassed 24 1C11 4 IC8 4 IC Unclassed 25 EC1 10041 5 Unclassed 39 A3 1A4 204 Unclassed 40 EC1 90A41 1 Unclassed V POS EC1 13C9 10 Unclassed VNEG EC1
32. If necessary click Expand to open the Logical Layers section ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select the layer or layers for which you want to change the color You can select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected You can also select individual logical 73 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS layers from the Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key while selecting to select multiple layers After you select a layer yau can do one of the following to modify its color Click Modify Color o and then select a color from the palette Use this button if you want to change the color of all logical layers associated with a selected physical layer or to change the color of many selected logical layers at the same time Double click a square in the Color column O ofthe Logical Layers section and then select a color from the palette Use this option to change the color of individual logical layers STEP RESULT The color of all selected layers changes in the Color column Click Apply to save the changes STEP RESULT The display updates in the workspace based on the changes you made to the layer color You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog Sorting Logical Layers You can sort the list of logical layers in the Logical Layers section by name visibility color or
33. Markup Entity sssessesessessssssossoesossossosooseestoseoseoeeoseeseeseteereereereersereeeeeeerreerereersres 250 Changing OB ect Ord ef sxiseoratenarcanienencsasean a E A ATR N ENAS 251 Hiding All Markup Entities s ssseesssssssssoooeeessssnsssosseeeseesnssssssscecseessosssssesseeessesnssssesseeeseosnsssssseeeeeessssss 251 Hiding Markup File Sijainnin ra a a A E RARS 251 Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities sesesssssssssecssssessssscssssscssssseessssscessseesnseseeees 252 Deleting Markup ENUItieS srme n e a ea a e aias 253 Formatting Markup Entity Properties s sssssssessessssseeeeeeeersereeesereeeseeeeesresreeeeereerserrsersreseesessessessssssssssss 253 Changing LNE Color saes n a vant oae s eE aaea a ee E Eiis 253 Changing Lime Stylesin a E aE i aE AE TNE a ett 254 Changing Line TAICKMESS sisisssissssisesssssaviranteisstierivenvipserieeaneiiepannmnnoeuseeninianmusnnasids 254 Changing Arrow Style an scss css ccscassceasecnscaecsonstvascasccsdesecapsssbens dcusnbsdseachvbccowsanseqtvconsnesdcnuslogtocsssngdastaidens 255 Changingihill Ty Be ates cients scteaese ethereal roe iano aia AA ss 255 FFA PVC FAH MEES OI AEE N O EE IE E EA 256 Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer ssssssesssscssscsecssccssesseecsecensesseesseess 257 CHANGING ONE esin an ARR EN EN A e Sa aes 257 Changing Measurement Units and Symbols s sssssssssssessossessoseoeeoeeeeeeeeesereereereeeeeeeereeeeeeeesresees 258 Using the Mark
34. Measure a STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points ona drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 223 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle be
35. NOTE In order to correctly display a file you must make sure all required resources are provided to AutoVue See Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon for information on missing XRefs TASK 1 Click the Missing Resource icon X or the Substituted Resource icon on the AutoVue status bar ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the File menu you can also select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 39 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Click the Resource Information tab to display details about missing or substi tuted resource information required to properly display this file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A green check mark indicates the resources that AutoVue is able to access A red 9 indicates that resources are not accessible A yellow exclamation mark _ indicates that a missing resource has been substituted for another resource Click OK to close the Properties dialog Adding an Overlay When working with 2D files you can overlay other files over the current active file You can also adjust an overlay move an overlay and scale an overlay by defining the X and Y coor dinates and the scaling factor NOTE When working with a raster file it should be used as the base file because raster formats are opaque and would hide files underneath them TASK 1 Open the file that you want to use as the base file for the overlay 2 From the File menu select Import File
36. Pointes iien n E A R A A A 42 Analyzing 2D Vector Files ssssssssssssssssesssssssssssessesseeseeseeseesseseeseeeesereeeeereeeeerteereerereserererreresrrsreseessessesesss 42 Comparing 2D Files sananne na a a a a 43 Drawing Informatio Nsan un ERER ANEN A RAREN 45 Working With PDF File Sron aca cvs ceevosyocssoncnsstcoucvscicasdipecnustna rect sudbonsitonccuuns oon eeo n Enso E eraasi SeS TSS 47 Navigating through Markus essssssseeessssssssseseeeseessssssssseecsessssssssssesceessessnsssesseeeseeosossssseeesressessssseesere 47 Me suring inPDF FIGS lt 5 sears cescidsscaietscotut cle Natetsna on a a EARNER 47 TO SCAN Chafee acetate a ee el cae ata E A EE tesa ahaa 47 Text SelectiOn CODY ss jccssttctraceach inti dnsdiesianencidsatia uondasheasidieis eSa AE a E 48 Meas ring 2D FILES 555 siceaiivcsscarssesesctiesces caeaceiesteation neatneeasia cantare naan E R IS SRN it 48 2D Vector Snapping MOCO sss seeen ii i o EE E e Eea ieina 49 Distanc lNiNoN Vector File Sdenenin na E E O AN 50 Distahcein Vector HlESiriisesin eeaeee es a esr hance E e e e iise 51 Calibrating Distance kaa NARRE N 51 Areain honNVector FilESsisssissnssnniossrinanniiisinsisiire ia i besodact chvebensaen nSk su ai 52 Area in Vector Fil Siisnannsniueco niena E arri e iE a aan ar asi 52 A gl innon Vector Files ca unausdnis ddasnacisinnmnndinadnaudaunnnaneumowmue 54 POACEAE CEO EINES E E E OE A EEE EEEE EEA 54 PAPC IM non Vector File Sres a R a ce caer blasts 55 Arein Vec
37. RAAT OTa IE AE ste se EE EEEE E EENE AORE AEA EE 111 Changingithe Visibility ssssiss rensie konse reenso esisnon rinos eiere ne esia tie teneo Senais ce roesai nern 112 Changing Model Colonia sasssiciadassaseenstinns dearetigiengacunsacasnun dense E R 112 Adjusting the iranspareney acs ante eatin came Ankateei deel cenit anauaces 113 Te lapetan A e E A E EE E T vdeau doses A E E baie ood ener 113 Setting Ambient Lighting sessssssseesssesssssssssesseessessnssseescesssessnsssssseeeseososssssseesresssssssssseseeessrsssssseseeesres 114 SECC Directional Lightissa esoiee in ei S a kesesi oins sasani 114 Adding a New Light SOURCE s ssseesssssssssssseeessesssssesscecseesssssssseesteesssssnsssesseresreonssssessteeeeeonsssssseerereerssss 115 Changing the Light Properties scsessssssesssssssssesssscssecsncsssssscsessssssussaccssssscesssseesuseacesscescssseaneans 115 Removing a Light SOUNCE ijacssssciveses ised asad astidorcdaitennstieaiaandnneid wna A s 116 IDA A AE ERE AE ETEO E O A TETAAN 116 Default NW acenion naia eiaa eea elles eect lcci aca 116 Setting Standard or Camera ViQWS c secssscssssscssssssessssscssssscsssssscsessssssussacessesseesssseesussaceascsscessenseans 117 Setting Native VIEW Sisirin nonnerne acensis aoaaa iaaea ea ataa iab Eai oiiaee e 117 Creating a User Defined View onenen aa a a TEE a i ie 117 Deleting a User Defined VieW ssssssssseseessssssssssssceessesssssssseecseessssssssseesterssesnssssessteesersnssssssee
38. Roy Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements 49 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Measurement Snapping Location Area Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Distance in non Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Distance tab In the Measure Distance Units list select a unit of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select the Cumulative check box Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selecte
39. Silkscreen Text or outlines in ink on the solder mask on the top and sometimes on the bottom of board modules A silkscreen is used for component and identification placement on a PCB and usually includes component outlines reference designators polarity indicators pin one markings part numbers the company name and copyright info SMT Surface Mount Technology PCB technology whereby the leads on the chips and components are soldered onto the surface of the board rather than inserted into it The use of SMT results in smaller and faster printed circuit boards Solder mask A negative plot of pads with a guard band around the pads Also a lacquer applied to prevent solder from adhering to unwanted areas on the PCB Solder paste A pattern that serves as a template for solder paste application when the board is manufactured Solder side The PCB surface opposite the one on which most components are mounted component side Also the bottom layer of the board Test point A special point of access to an electrical circuit that is used for electrical testing purposes Through hole via A via that connects the surface layers on a PCB 288 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Trace Track Definition The copper trails electrical connection between two or more points on the PCB and the onscreen representation of that copper Venting patterns Patte
40. Surface if you want to measure the surface area of a face on an entity Select Entity Surfaces if you want to measure the surface area of an entire entity wm fF WN From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the surface ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one surface click Cumulative 6 Ifyou selected Face Surface move the cursor on the model to highlight a face surface then click the face surface that you want to measure STEP RESULT The face surface is highlighted The measured surface appears in the Measure ment dialog 7 Ifyou selected Entity Surface click the entity that you want to measure STEP RESULT The entity as well as all the faces belonging to the body are highlighted The measured surface of the body appears in the Measurement dialog 8 To measure the face surface of the entity click on the highlighted body STEP RESULT A list appears displaying the entity and its parents 9 Select the entity or a parent from the list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To measure the face surface of a parent select the parent from the list STEP RESULT The selected entity is highlighted and the measured surface appears in the Measurement dialog 10 To take another measurement click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 156 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Walkthrough The Walkthrough feature in AutoVue provides an inter
41. The following print settings are supported Page Orientation Scaling Paper Size Print Areas Page Breaks Row and Column headers Grid lines Left Right Top Bottom margins Force to Black Force all colors to grayscale Output a single page Limits output to a single page when the scaling options selected causes a single page to span over several pages NOTE This option is only enabled when Scale of Factor is selected in the Scaling section Skip Blank Pages This option omits blank pages when printing Print Notes When in Markup mode select this option to print the Note markups of the current file NOTE This option is only available when in Markup mode Print One Note Per Page When in Markup mode select this option to print one Note markup per page of the current file NOTE This option is only available when in Markup mode Print Row Headers Select this option to print row headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and archive files 266 PRINTING CONFIGURING THE PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Print Column Headers Option Description Select this option to print column headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and archive files Partial Preview Display a view of the printer page highlighting the printable area Configuring the Print Options TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Au
42. There are configuration options that you can set to customize the work environment when working with 3D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 From the Category tree select 3D STEP RESULT The Rendering Dynamic Rendering and Frame Rate options appear Rendering The Rendering options let you modify the manner in which the model is rendered Changing these options affects the level of detailed displayed The Rendering options are Option Smooth Shading Description Set by default Turning this option off renders curved surfaces of shaded models as a series of flat surfaces The level of detail is thus reduced but render speed is increased Only affects shaded models Back Face Removal If selected instructs AutoVue not to render the back faces of the model being displayed This increases the render speed but the model appears less realistic while in motion Only affects shaded models Tristrip If selected enable disable tristripping of mesh data for display Dynamic Rendering The Dynamic Rendering options let you select the rendering mode for a model in motion The options you can select are 169 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Menu Option Description Fast Frame Model spins or rotates at a fast rate The level of detail is reduced which enables faster rendering when the
43. Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter rela tion of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 100 WORKING WITH 3D FILES Views TAB NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models 2 F E J E 7 3D50iidEdge _stot H B 3DSolidEdge_go_ C H B 3DSolidEdge_arre C H Y 3DSolidEdge_scre C popoo0p0oor r000 opo0o0p0oro o000 Models Views Tab The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views oo FBDefault view a bene Views Isometric a Right c 3 Native views i Default i Isometric l gga User Defined Views Models views Bookmarks 101 WORKING WITH 3D FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks R Design 3D Model Components Nets
44. a different session you can view the Layer sets when you open the Markup file See Markups Manipulating EDA Views As with any 2D file with the View options you can instantly manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can rotate a file s orientation clockwise or counter clockwise by 90 degrees See 2D Viewing Options for more information on View options AutoVue provides several ways to change the view size of a selected area of a file display different views layers and blocks of the current active file You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file 77 WORKING WITH EDA FILES 3D VIEW 3D View For some ECAD formats AutoVue supports 3D views of PCB boards TASK 1 Inthe Navigation Panel click the Bookmarks tab 2 Select 3D Model from the navigation tree RESULT The 3D view of the PCB board is displayed in the workspace NOTE 3D view can also be accessed from the View menu selecting Page and then selecting Next or from the AutoVue toolbar and then clicking Next Page Cross Probing Cross probing is the ability to select elements in the schematic and have them mapped to the corresponding components in the layout drawings and vice versa The following sections provide information on cross probing between two or more EDA files displaying the net connectivity when cross probing and cross probing between 2D and 3D views of the sam
45. a symbol to STEP RESULT The appropriate Measure dialog appears Deselect Display Unit check box if you want to hide the unit on the drawing It is selected by default From the Units list select the unit that you want to change the measurement to From the Symbol list select the symbol that you want to add to the measurement Click OK RESULT The unit of measure changes and the selected symbol is added to the measurement and appears in the workspace Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog You can use the Markup Entity Properties dialog to modify markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to modify To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attri butes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click a markup entity in the Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears 258 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Line Color Change the line color the selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer amp changes the entity color to the color of the la
46. between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc 6 FromtheArc Information section select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 7 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 98 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 9 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 Fromthe Units list select a unit of measurement to which
47. can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can print the file from the Print Preview window by clicking Print You can also zoom in and out of a file as well as navigate from one page to another of a multi page file STEP RESULT The file appears in Print Preview Mode in the Print Preview window 5 Click Close to close the Print Preview window Printing a File You can print original files along with their Markup files and selected markup layers together so that they appear as one file TASK 1 Open the file you want to print 2 To print the associated markups open the Markup file or files you want to print 3 Ifyou are printing Markup files and you want to print the visible layers from the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 4 Select the markup layers you want visible Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog 275 PRINTING BATCH PRINTING From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Batch P
48. click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line and the measurement appears in the Measure ment Entities dialog 11 If you selected Shape click the edge of a predefined shape on the drawing STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted 12 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snap ping modes click All Off 4 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Ifyou
49. deselected then an entity only has to match one dimension in order to appear in the Results list Enter the minimum and maximum dimensions in their respective fields 4 From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Volume dimensions To search for entities by location select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Fits completely check box If the check box is deselected then an entity only has to match one dimension to appear in the Results list 6 From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Location dimensions Enter the dimensions for Point 1 and Point 2 8 Click the 3D Search tab 146 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Saving Search Results 9 Click Search STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appears in the Results list 10 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog TASK 1 Perform a 3D entity search 2 Click Search STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the type and name 3 To save the results click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 4 Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file name then click Save RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file Measuring in 3D Files AutoVue provides the ability
50. having its own unique name You can create name and color layers to organize your work For example different colors can indicate time priorities and each layer can contain markups with a common purpose When working with markup layers you can view layers individually or in combination add rename or delete layers You can also specify a different color for each layer NOTE The default layer color is red See Also Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Creating a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can create a markup layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears Markup Layers a T cy m wi Markup M LayerName COLOR acad2006 002 0 Red acad2006 001 0 Red All OFF Untitled4 lo Red Untitled5 o Red BRIEK Currently Active Layer lo 2 Click New STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears 3 Enter a name for the markup layer 191 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new markup layer is added to the list in the Markup Layers dialog 5 To change the color of the new layer click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears The default layer color is red 6 Select a color and click OK 7 Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Setting the Active Markup Layer A markup can have several layers and you can set a la
51. if there are four levels with level 2 being the first level under the main assembly then level 3 and level 4 are added to the list Selected parts the number of available levels to be added to the list depends on the selected virtual tree Animated When selected animation is shown while exploding or imploding the model Show Arrows When selected arrows are displayed in an explosion assembly The arrow starts from an exploded entity and points to the center point of its parent Scroll Explode Dragging the slider gradually displays the progression of the explosion to show the explosion dynamics Explode pressing brings the explosion level to the n 1 level if current explosion level is between n 1 inclusive and n level exclusive Implode pressing brings the explosion level to the n level if current explosion level is between n 1 exclusive and n level inclusive 134 WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Exploding a 3D Model TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Explode H STEP RESULT The Explode dialog appears 2 Select the parts that you want to explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To explode the entire model ensure that no parts are selected 3 From the Maximum Depth list select the level to which you want the model
52. last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created 183 MARKUPS FILTERING MARKUPS Property Layer Description Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties Filtering Markups When viewing markups you have the option to filter the Markup files or entities that are displayed based on their metadata information To do so from the Markup menu select Filter and then select one of the following options By Author By Entity Types By Last Modified By Page and By Layer The Filter Markup Visibility dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Markup Filter 7 To display markups created by a specific author click the Author tab and select the check box next to the author s name To remove an author s markup from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Author column header e To display markups by entity type click the Markup Entity tab and select the check box next to the markup entity or entities To remove a markup entity from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the M
53. measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordinates radius ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure lal STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 154 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 2 Click the Vertex tab STEP RESULT All vertices on the model are highlighted From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure 4 Move the cursor over the highlighted vertex that you want to measure STEP RESULT The X
54. model is in motion Wire Frame Model is displayed as wire framed during rotation or spinning Flat Shading Smooth shading is not performed on curved surfaces while the model is in motion Wire Polygons Render the model in wire polygon mode while in motion Vertex Cloud Model is displayed as a skeleton of vertices when in motion Bounding Box Model parts are enclosed by bounding boxes when the model is in motion Current Render Mode Model is rendered in the same mode whether moving or static Frame Rate The Frame Rate slider lets you define the frame rate for rotating and dynamic zooming on 3D files Drag the slider to specify the frame rate Drag the slider to the left for a lower frame rate and to the right for a higher frame rate A higher frame rate results in a lower resolution Optimized Rendering Model Select the Enable Optimized Rendering option to accelerate the rendering time of draw ings Note that NOTE You must restart your AutoVue client after selecting or deselecting this option to apply the setting The Model configuration options let you control the streaming method the dynamic load mesh resolution and the visibility of model parts From the Category tree expand 3D and then select Model to load the Loading Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Initial Visibility and PMI Initial Visibility options 170 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Loading Contro
55. must be observed during the production of the object displayed in the 3D model At the highest level PMI provides information about dimensions feature control frames weld specifications and surface finishes This information is based upon key design features which are specified through datum targets measurement points reference geom etry for example construction lines surfaces and objects or the geometry inherent in the object The following terms can be used interchangeably with the term PMI Datums Cosmetics Dimensioning Cosmetics Geometric Tolerances GTOLs Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance GDT or GD amp T Functional Tolerance Annotation FTA or FTA amp A PMI Filtering Use PMI Filtering to select which types of product and manufacturing information to display TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select PMI Filtering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click PMI Filtering ra STEP RESULT The PMI Filtering dialog appears and displays all PMI types 2 Inthe Tree column select the check box beside the items that you want to display in the Model Tree 3 Inthe View column select the check box beside the items that you want to display on the 3D model 124 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES 4 Deselect the check box beside the items that you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click All to show all items or click Non
56. of the following Select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section Logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected When you make changes to a selected physical layer the logical layers associated with it are also affected Select one or multiple logical layers from the Logical Layers section To select multiple logical layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 Click one of the following buttons Click Bring to Front F to move all selected layers to the front in the workspace In the Logical Layers section these layers move to the top of the list Click Up _ _ to move selected layers up one layer Click Down to move selected layers down one layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag and drop selected logical layers in the Logical Layers section 5 Click Apply to see the changes in the workspace STEP RESULT The file now displays according to the layer scheme you arranged Also logical layers are renumbered in the Order column of Logical Layers section 6 You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog 71 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific physical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue
57. or PMI filters as search criteria to filter entities You can also search for entities by the size of an entity and location or select entities from the results list and have them appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Model Tree The search options are 141 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where 3D Search tab Option Selection Description Specify if you want to search the entire model or selected parts or parts that are not selected Type Specify the type of entity you want to search For example part body assembly or PMI Show PMI parent entity in results When selected displays only the parent entity of a PMI entity that matches search criteria If cleared displays PMI entities that match search criteria in the Results dialog Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All and file has PMI entities PMI Filter Filters the entities that have PMI information Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All PMI Type Specify the specific PMI attribute you want to search Option is disabled if PMI Filter is set to All Containing Text Specify a text string that you want to search AutoVue searches for a specified string in attribute names and attribute values Attribute Filters Specify attributes to search for in 3D model See Performing an Attribute based Search Attribute Filter dialog Name Specify the specific attribute you want to
58. or parts that you want to scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box Click and drag a corner cube of the box up or down to scale the selected model part To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 2 or from the Manipulate menu select Manipulate RESULT 128 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Trans form and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Transforming a 3D Model Using the illustrated transformation buttons or by entering X Y or Z values you can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define The Transformation dialog appears as follows Transformation Ls ial Ready Rotate Degree Translation fmm gt _ oo v lo v o Ed 0 Mirror Scale vz Ol xO xO Factor 1 o solute ptions Absolut Opti NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Transform I In the Transformation dialog the buttons on the left correspond to a rotational movement along the three axes and the buttons on the right correspond to a transla
59. physical layer TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers Ss STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Click the column header of an attribute RESULT Layers are sorted according to the attribute header you click For example if you click the Color o column header the logical layers in the section are grouped according to their color NOTE To restore the original sort order click the Order column header 74 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS Layer Sets A layer set is comprised of all the physical and logical layers in the drawing Layer sets differ in the attributes of the different layers for example z order visibility and color You can also define your own layer sets to control which layers you can view and print Viewing Layer Sets AutoVue lists top bottom and default layer sets as well as any layer set that is stored in the file You can choose to display any layer set you need You can also create user defined layer sets and display them later To view a layer set take the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers z STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 From the Layer Sets lis
60. possible to convert Office 2D and EDA formats to PDF When converted from Markup Mode markups are added to the contents of the base PDF file When you open the PDF you will see the base file along with all markups X and Y Three factors affect the resolution of an image the type of image you are scanning the output device and the acceptable file size High resolution scans often require large files causing longer processing and print time Note that a high resolution may not produce a better quality printed image if your output device does not recognize the higher resolution information stored in the file To keep file sizes manageable select the lowest resolution that provides acceptable quality on your output device With some file types the Size option appears giving you a choice between millimeters and inches Page sizes can be selected from the Size list or you can customize page sizes by configuring the Initialization file For more information refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide Technical Drawing Page Sizes ISO Paper Format A8 5 X 11 0 216 mm X 279 mm A4 285 mm X 198 mm B11 0 X 17 0 279 mm X 432 mm A3 396 mm X 273 mm C17 0 X 22 0 432 mm X 559 mm A2 570 mm X 396 mm D22 0 X 34 0 559 mm X 864 mm Al 817 mm X 570 mm 280 CONVERSION CONVERTING A FILE Technical Drawing Page Sizes ISO Paper Format E34 0 X 44 0 864 mm X 1118 mm AO 1165 mm X 817 mm Converting
61. select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the area you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 213 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 9 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle a STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 3 Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure The first click defines the starting point of the angle measurement The second click defines the vertex of the angle
62. selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle If you selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 231 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 8 Right click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle appears in the Measurement Enti ties dialog 9 To change the size of the arc click and drag the it to the desired size 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center and diam eter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Are amp STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect al
63. settings If not found on the client side AutoVue will attempt to retrieve 164 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS the XREFs on the server If Resolve Local Resources is unchecked AutoVue attempts to resolve the XRefs on the server side only Configuring Paths Configure the paths for XRefs and fonts These path settings are read only if Resolve Local Resources is checked When working with files that need external resources such as fonts or XRefs you may need to specify the path to these external resources if they do not exist in the same location as the base file Path Description XRefs The directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files Font The directory paths for fonts required by Auto Vue s vector files Configuring XRef Paths XRef Paths are the directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files TASK 1 2 From the Category tree expand General and then select XRef Paths Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external refer ence files are located To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two asterisks at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing all subdirec tories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of th
64. snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files the Snapping Modes option is disabled However you can free snap to any point on the drawing AutoVue provides several measure options that you can choose from You can access the measure options from Analysis menu and selecting Measure or from the AutoVue toolbar click Measure ia The measure options are as follows 48 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Name Distance Description Measure the distance between two points See Distance in non Vector Files Distance in Vector Files Area Measure selected area See Area in non Vector Files Area in Vector Files Angle Measure the angle between selected points or between two lines See Angle in non Vector Files Angle in Vector Files Arc Measure an arc entity See Arc in non Vector Files Arc in Vector Files 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity Button Snap to XI End point Description Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point
65. that are not selected select Not selected 4 From the Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For 3D Models that have PMI information the PMI search features are enabled 5 Select the Show PMI parent entity in results check box if you only want the parent entity of the selected PMI entity or entities to appear in the Results list 6 Deselect the check box if you want all PMI entities to appear in the Results list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The option is enabled if PMI or All are selected from the Type list and the file has PMI entities 143 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 7 From the PMI Filter list select the type of entities that you want to search To search all entities select All To search entities with PMI select With PMI To search entities without PMI select Without PMI 8 From the PMI Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The PMI Type list is disabled if All is selected from the PMI Filter list 9 Click Search to perform the entity search RESULT The search results appear in the Results list Performing a 3D Text Search From the Containing Text field of the Entity Search dialog you can search for a text string in the 3D model By default AutoVue searches the attribute name and attribute value for the entered text Enter the text you want to search for in the Containing Text field and then c
66. the AutoVue workspace See Re Centering Selected Only available when one or more model parts are selected The selected part or parts are considered as the central reference point by which the model is repositioned See Re Centering Entity Select a model part or entity as a central reference point to reposition a model See Re Centering Default View Displays view of the model when it is initially loaded You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Camera Views Displays different views of 3D models Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left Right and View Points You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Views Access native views of the model or access and create your own views You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Page Next Page Go to the next page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click acl Previous Page Go to the previous page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click EL Page Number Go to the specified page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click i 110 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Display Attributes AutoVue provides several different render methods to display a 3D CAD mod
67. the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model Click M Set 2 Repeat step 5 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is high lighted by a line The measured minimum distance X Y and Z coordinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement dialog To take another measurement click Reset Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 152 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the
68. the Don t display PMI for large models check box and then enter the number of PMIs to display in the PMI Threshold field 171 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES PMI Filtering From the tree expand 3D and then select PMI to display the PMI options The PMI Filtering options let you configure which types of product and manufacturing information to display The check boxes in the Tree column let you select which PMI entity types display in the 3D model tree The check boxes in the View column let you select which PMI entity types display in the workspace The following PMI Text Rendering Style options let you define the style for the PMI text Option Description Native Setting from PMI text displays with the default setting file 3D PMI text displays in 3 dimensions It may not always face you Flat to screen PMI text always faces you Configuring Color With the Color options you can configure the color to allow easier viewing of 3D file details From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Colors to view the available Color options They are grouped under Common Section Highlight and Geometry Highlight as follows Common Option Description Background Set the background color for 3D view Selection Set the color when selecting a model or model parts Min Distance Set 1 Set the color of the first set point when measuring minimum distance
69. the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 242 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2i STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want
70. the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT All included resources are listed in the Resource Information tab If a resource that is required to fully display the file is missing it is listed with the Missing Resource icon 2 If a resource is found it appears with the Found Resource icon If a required resource is missing and AutoVue substitutes it with another resource the Substituted 4 To view native properties click the Native Properties tab Click OK to close the Properties dialog Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages AutoVue provides navigation buttons in the AutoVue toolbar to allow you to flip through a drawing for example Office 2D EDA or 3D files that contains multiple pages The navigation buttons appear by default The toolbar contains frequently used tools Previous Page K Next Page p and Page Number Qa You can also access the navigation buttons from the View menu by selecting Page and then the required navigation button 30 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 31 Working With 2D Files When working with vector and non vector 2D files in AutoVue you can instantly change how the active file is displayed in the workspace by choosing from a number of different view options For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise When viewing 2D vector files you have access to entity information vie
71. the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing AutoVue provides the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options 226 Markups CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc A Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area E gt Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance a Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between entities From the Markup Entity toolbar click Minimum Distance ae EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until th
72. the filter or filters that you want to disable 11 To enable an Attribute Filter select the check box beside the filter or filters 12 To remove an Attribute Filter in the Entity Search dialog select the filter and click Remove STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter disappears from the list 13 Inthe Entity Search dialog click Search STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the name and type of the entities 14 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog 145 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH Performing an Advanced 3D Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities using volume or location filters Volume specifies the size of the entity you can specify the minimum and maximum dimen sions an entity must be between Location specifies an axes aligned boundary box you can specify the dimensions for an axes aligned boundary box that an entity must be inside TASK 1 From the Entity Search dialog click the Advanced 3D Search tab Entity Search 3D Search Advanced 3D Search volume C Enabled Minimum Dimensions Maximum Dimensions x Yi i Location C Enabled Point 1 Point 2 2 To search for entities by Volume select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Completely contained check box If the check box is
73. the following measure options Name Description Angle Measure the precise angle between three vertices or any two edges planes or faces From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 238 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Name Description Arc Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the center point location From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc gq Distance Measure the precise distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance der aa You cannot create a markup measure entity when measuring minimum distance Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordinates y xZ 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same
74. tion ADDITIONALINFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected area a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again To exit right click the mouse anywhere in the workspace STEP RESULT The List Entities dialog appears displaying the information of all the selected entities 3 Click OK to close the List Entities dialog Working with PDF Files This section lists AutoVue features that are specific to Adobe PDF files Navigating through Markups When navigating through markups AutoVue preserves the current zoom level For example when the Go To feature is selected from the Markup Navigation tree AutoVue highlights the markup entity in the workspace AutoVue navigates to markup entity if on a different page and maintains the current zoom level Measuring in PDF Files When measuring vector based PDFs AutoVue allows you to snap to certain entities to take measurements You can snap to the end points or mid points of an entity AutoVue also allows you to snap to shapes closed entities for area measurements This option also applies when adding a Markup Measure entity to the PDF file NOTE For Angle and Arc entities only 3 point snapping is available See Measuring in 2D Files See Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities Text Search You can perform a text search in vector based PDF files where the scanner performs Optical Character Recognition OCR
75. to explode 4 Select Animated if you want to see an animated view of the explosion ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This option is selected by default 5 Select Show Arrows if you want to display the arrows 6 To explode the model click e STEP RESULT The whole model or the select model parts explode 7 To implode the model click lt ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To manually change the explosion state click and drag the scroll bar 8 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The explode state remains displayed and the Transformation column E in the Model Tree is updated indicating the exploded parts See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model From the Explode dialog you can save the exploded view of the 3D model TASK 1 2 Explode a 3D Model Click Save View in the Explode dialog STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears Enter a view name 135 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The view is saved and appears in the Views tab under the User Defined Views tree 5 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The exploded state is saved See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model Comparing 3D Files When comparing 3D files in a non integrated environment we recommend that you use Universal Naming Convention UNC file names or the server protocol so as to ensure that all required
76. to Cadence Allegro format only Non plated Hole Visibility Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off the non plated hole visibility NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Pad Filling Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off pad filling NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Line Caps Joins Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off line caps joins NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Global Transparency Move slider to select global transparency level Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files Specify background colors for mono raster files and color raster files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog that appears Select Graphics in the tree From their respective Background lists select colors for monochrome raster files and color raster files 180 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE Configuring Background Colors for Desktop Office Specify background colors for the following types of Desktop Office files Document Spreadsheet Database and Archive TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 Select Desktop Office in the tree 3 Select a background color for each Desktop Office file type 181 Markups Auto
77. toolbar you can also click Layers Se STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Inthe Physical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description All physical layers Click the All column header One physical layer Select the check box to the left of the layer name You can also select a layer and click Visibility One entity type for all Click the column header For example click the Trace column header to physical layers show or hide all trace entities of all physical layers One entity type for one Click a specific check box physical layer Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace 4 You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check boxes for physical layers can have four states checked unchecked gray checked and gray unchecked Check boxes that are checked and gray indicate that the entities of a physical layer are neither all visible nor all hidden Gray unchecked check boxes that you cannot select indicate that there is no entity of that type for that layer Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific logical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers Se STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens If
78. view options vary depending on the file Examples of the view options are Last Saved View Presentation Front Back Left Right Top Bottom Isometric Trimetric and Dimetric You can also click the Views tab and then click the view from the Native Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Views and then select Native Views Creating a User Defined View You may want to create and save your own views AutoVue allows you to define a view and add it to the User Defined Views You can define a customized view in View or Markup mode Any views you apply to displayed models during Markup mode are saved as part of the Markup file TASK 1 Apply your own views or transformation to the displayed model ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The view states that you can apply and save for your defined view are Extents Rotation Model Transformation Explosion Render Modes Color Transpar ency Visibility Sectioning Camera Settings and views involving Mockups 117 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D VIEWS 2 From the View menu select Views select User Defined Views and then select Add View ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Views then select User Defined Views and then select Add View STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears Enter a view name for the view that you want to define 4 Click OK to close the Add User Defined View dialog RESULT To see the view you
79. want to compare with the newer file Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you apply a change from the View menu all three windows display the synchronized change STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the newer file the second displaying the older file and the third displaying the comparison results To access the Compare options right click in any of the windows ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To maximize any of the windows click the O button on the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To minimize click the button To restore the window click the E button STEP RESULT A menu appears displaying the Compare options When comparing AutoCAD files you can view a file without viewports To do so from the View menu select View Without Viewports To maximize any of the windows double click the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To restore the window double click the title bar 44 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 8 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONALINFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare Mode RESULT The newer file appears in the workspace Align and Scale You can scale or translate a file in order to compare files accurately With the Align and Scale option you can select to automatically align the files select points to align and scale modify the coordinates X
80. windows e The right window displays the newer version of the document e The left window displays the older version of the document The bottom window displays the comparison results By default the result windows display added deleted and unchanged entities In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three To access these 43 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES options right click in any window and select an option from the pop up menu By default the Comparison Result window displays the unchanged deleted and added information NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison The comparison results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are Option Color Description View Additions Green Displays data that is present in the newer file but not in the older file View Deletions Red Displays data that is missing in the newer file but present in the older file View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change between the newer file and old file TASK View the newer file in AutoVue From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to select the file that you
81. you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design NOTE To hide or display the Navigation Panel click ig The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity information Components va Components RefDes Part Type Location U4 BOFPCE 29 0001 C1 CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 ui _ SOP6SP _ 50 0001 U2 SOP63P 50 0001 o U3 SSOP5O 50 0001 5 SSOP50 50 000 R4 RESC16 7 00001 R3 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESC16 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 RANI RESCAX 9 00001 RN2 RESCAX 9 00001 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 RAN4 RESCAX 9 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 1 Sw_SNA 11 0001 52 SW SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 _ DISPLAY1 7SEGSMD 29 0001 gm gt Component Pins Name Location W
82. you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you want it in the list 6 To remove a path select the path and click Remove STEP RESULT The selected path disappears from the list 7 Click OK to close the Configuration dialog Measurement The Measurement options let you define the default measurement units and the number of decimal places From the Configuration tree expand General and then select Measurement to display the options you need The available options are as follows 166 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES Option Description Decimal Digits Lets you specify the number of decimal digits displayed for each measurement Enter a number from 1 to 18 Default File Units Lets you specify the units to use for drawings when the drawings do not contain units Measurement Units Lets you specify the default unit to use for measurements Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files The Base Font option lets you define the font properties for archive text and spreadsheet files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Base Font 2 Select a font from the Font list 3 Select a font size from the Size list 4 Select the Bold option Italic option or both options to change the font style ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can see a preview of the text in the Sample area 5 Click OK to apply the font change and clos
83. 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 4 STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears listing the layers and layer visi bility for the current active file To sort the list of layers in the dialog click Name to sort alphabetically or numeri cally or click Status to sort by visibility You can modify the visibility of a layer or layers by doing one of the following Deselect select the Status check box beside the layers that you want to hide display Click All On to display all the layers or click All Off to hide all the layers Select a layer from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide display the layer Click OK to close the dialog and to apply your changes Selecting Blocks Use this option to select a block to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Blocks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Blocks i STEP RESULT The Select a Block to Display dialog appears listing the blocks for the current active file 2 From the list select the block that you want to display 3 Click OK STEP RESULT The selected block is displayed Displaying XRefs AutoVue references various sources to obtain all the data required to completely and correctly display files These sources can
84. 15 properties 115 remove light source 116 manipulate mode 127 panning model 127 rotating model 127 scaling model 128 manipulating views 109 markup entities 237 markup measure entities create 238 markups 196 237 measuring 147 angle 153 arc 153 calibrating arc 56 99 154 215 226 233 244 calibrating distance 51 95 151 213 222 230 242 distance 150 edge length 155 face surface 156 minimum distance 152 292 snapping modes 148 239 vertex coordinates 154 mockups 108 delete 108 Model Tree 105 106 107 hiding 107 XRefs 106 Models tab 22 100 PMI entities 124 recentering 104 105 entity reference 104 render modes 111 112 sectioning 132 cut options 132 options 132 section plane 133 selecting model parts 103 text markup 246 transformation 129 buttons 130 reset 130 setting values 131 Views tab 23 101 3D dynamic rendering 169 3D Model Tree 22 100 3D rendering 169 3D views 116 camera view 117 default view 116 layers 119 native views 117 perspective 118 user defined view 117 delete 118 view points 119 A About dialog version and buid information 16 archive files 29 arrow style 261 AutoVue 14 basics 16 graphical user interface 17 GUI menu bar 18 293 toolbars 18 AutoVue GUI AutoVue properties toolbar 18 AutoVue toolbar 18 Markup entity toolbar 18 AutoVue properties toolbar 18 AutoVue toolbar 18 base font 167 batch print 264 276 Bill of Material BOM 82 Bookmarks tab 20
85. 16 colors 8 256 colors 24 True color auto AutoVue selects the color depth that best matches the original file Convert to Format A list of all the possible types of output file formats currently available for conversion The available formats are PDF TIFF Windows Bitmap NOTE Conversion to PDF is not supported when the Auto Vue server is running on Linux platforms Output Specify the name and path of the file in which the conversion is to be stored This file is also known as the output file You can use Browse to provide AutoVue with the file s path If writing onto an existing file a warning message appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing file 278 CONVERSION CONVERTING A 3D MODEL Option Sub Format Description The Sub Format list appears when you select HP Laserjet Print or TIFF from the Convert to Format list Select a sub format from the list Convert Region The area of the file to be converted The available options are Display The area displayed in the workspace For example if you zoomed in on a particular region of the file the zoomed portion of the file is converted Extent Refers to the entire extents of the file Selected The selected entity is converted Convert Pages The pages to be converted The available options are All convert all pages Current convert the current page Range convert the pages indicated in t
86. 3 ETa E AIA PAC cde sacs ccs E E NEEE cases doce E EA 153 ATTA ST ACUI eA PSF Ccctssc tests n tesa ons asl nas eeaosen orga aA I Eos 154 Measuring Vertex Coordinates cscsscsessscssssssssssssssssesssssussacssssssssussasssuseaccascsscesssasssuseaseascesceassaneass 154 Measuring the Length of an Edge csssssssssssssssscsssssessessscsssssscssssssssusescesssescesssaeesuseacsasseseeseeaseees 155 Measuring Face Surfaces isassissisannteandennsisieniaeincunosnniiinmusniunnenonmtienananien 156 WalktAroug N Seane en a a Ta eea aaa a or E Ea EER RE ES 157 Veil ICCA CYAN eal Chics sasesvessss ss cusses cavsseinsyeacaas sey ess less A A NORR si 158 Walking Through a 3D Model c sessscssssssssessessscssssssssssssessnssscsssssscssscssssussssssncsucsssssscsussaesnceacensesees 159 Adding Markups in Walkthrough MOde ssssssssssssssssssssssssesnssssssscsssssssssnssssssncsecesseseesnseacensess 159 Configuring AUILOVUG lennni RE EEE EE R RTS 162 Genera DUIS ssa e cada eases E dota asa ua TSE ETOS E ei n EnS 163 Configuring Options for CAD Files s sessssessssssscecseesssssssseecseesssssnsssesseeesseosnssessereseresnsssssseeereeosesss 163 Raster Files sez tcc aces n a a ea a e a E E t a A EEEE 164 Render Oa a e T N EA AA A nee ANS 164 RUKTO LA EE E E E E E EES 164 Configuring Path Siss anesan inin i E EAEE O En ES 165 Measurement oeme ees asta aa A ier Mates ald atta ras a a S a E R 166 Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files
87. 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for arc center coordinates radius diameter ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 244 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring Minimum Distance With the Minimum Distance option you can measure the
88. 4 Entity Types 184 filtering 184 formatting markup properties 253 freestyle 208 contiguous 208 non contiguous 209 296 go to 249 grouping 252 hiding all markups 251 hiding selected markups 251 hyperlink 198 create 198 delete 200 edit 200 open 200 intellistamp 216 add 216 layers 191 change color 192 create 191 delete 194 moving a markup entity 194 rename 193 set active 192 toggle 193 leader 209 marking up 2D files 196 marking up 3D files 196 Markup Entity Properties dialog 258 arrow style 261 custom color 262 custom line color 259 custom line thickness 260 fill color 262 fill type 261 leader alignment 263 line color 259 line style 259 line thickness 260 markup layers 262 text box visibility 263 Markup file 15 create 186 export 189 import 188 open 187 save 187 188 save view 185 set active 190 view 190 Markup files 185 Markup Filter 184 296 markup information 186 Markup Navigation Tree 24 183 Markup Panel 24 183 measurement units and symbols 258 moving markups 250 nesting entities 237 249 note 236 248 rotating selected markups 250 selecting markups 250 signoff 201 history 202 re approve 202 rescind 202 stamp 204 stamp library 205 delete 206 text 235 text box visibility 235 transforming markups 250 ungrouping 252 working with markup entities 249 mass properties 121 122 Measure Distance 2D non vector 50 51 measurement units and symbols 258 Missing Resource icon 39 missing resources 39 m
89. 5 2 CLK4 UNSPEC 023 9 CLK4 JIN U22 13 CLK4 OUT SMDSO SMDSO SMDSO lt i Components Nets Bookmarks Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter rela tion of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 22 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models el VPage 1 oO e SolidEdge_ilearn se lt C h V 2D50lidEdge_top 6 i MY 3DSolidEdge_stor g T V 2D50lidEdge_g0_ H D 3DSolidEdge_arre C H B 3DSolidEdge_scre C popoo0p0oor r000 popoo0ogo ononr00 Models Vi Views Tab The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views FH Default view a P Ccamera views e Isometric Top H WB Front Back Left ow Right if Native Views e Default i Isometric oo gaff User Defined Views Models views
90. 72 PRINTING ASSIGNING PEN SETTINGS Assigning Pen Settings From the Pen Settings tab of the Print Properties dialog you can set the thickness of the color indices for the print file NOTE AutoVue uses the default pen color indices of the native document for the vector file being viewed You will not be able to change the color assigned to a pen with AutoVue TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print eB STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Pen Settings tab 3 Under From To select the Color Index that you want to assign a new pen thick ness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To change more than one color indices press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 From the Units list select the unit of measure that you want to set the thickness Enter the new thickness STEP RESULT The new Thickness appears beside the Color Index 6 In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties Configure other print options 8 To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 9 Click OK to print STEP RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Creating a New Pen Setting TASK 1 Set the thickness for the color indices that you want 2 Click Save As The Save As dialog appears 273 PRINTING PARTIAL PREVIEW OF A
91. ASK 1 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup STEP RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode Create a Note markup entity See Adding a Note for more information on how to create Note markup entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can continue walking through the model while creating new Note markup entities Save your new markups See Saving a New Markup File for more information STEP RESULT The markups are saved To exit Markup mode from the Markup menu select Close All To view the 3D model s associated Markup files select Open from the Markup menu See Opening Markup Files for more information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Note markup entities appear in the Markup Entity tree but not in the workspace To view the markups double click the Note entities in the Markup Entity tree STEP RESULT The markups open and the Note markup icon 3 appears in the workspace 160 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH 161 Configuring AutoVue Use the configuration options to configure the AutoVue workspace for different groups of file formats or for all files in general For example you can set different background colors for EDA 2D 3D or Office files You can also set paths to locate external resources such as fonts symbols XRefs or configure measurement options To access the configuration options from the Options
92. All entities of the selected snapping modes are highlighted on the model 4 From the Units list select a measurement unit On the model select an entity as the starting point for the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select Fix Position 150 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 On the model select the entity you want to measure to RESULT The distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement dialog Addi tionally the coordinates for the center point of each entity displays in the From lad and To fields To take another measurement click Reset Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calib
93. AutoVue highlights the text search result in the 47 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES workspace and maintains the current document zoom level If the text is very small AutoVue zooms in to the highlighted text If the text if outside the visible workspace area AutoVue scrolls pans to display the highlighted text See Searching Text Text Selection Copy You can select and copy text from a vector based PDF file where the scanner performs Optical Character Recognition OCR To do so highlight the text and then select Copy from the Edit menu alternately you can use the shortcut key Ctrl C You can then paste the text to the Note markup entity or a third party application for example MS Word NOTE Note the following behaviors when copying text from a PDF file in Auto Vue It may not be possible to copy text if the PDF file has a security restriction When copying text from PDF files AutoVue displays the text as it appears in the PDF That is AutoVue inserts a line break if text continues to a next line word wrapping in the PDF In some PDF files when copying text that includes line spaces AutoVue may not insert the spaces This is because the line spaces are not saved in the PDF file Measuring in 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 2D files Measurement options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to
94. Bookmarks 23 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Markup Navigation Tree When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups vq Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer E Untitled2 AL Text JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 06 AM 1 0 m Leader JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 08 AM 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 AM 1 0 Highlight JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 24 AM_1 0 O Box JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 294M 1 0 Z Line JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created Author The name of the user who created the markup entity Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author an
95. Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts Ifa plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower book mark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Global Axes By default there is a three axis representation in the lower left corner of the workspace The X axis is red the Y axis is green and the Z axis is blue When transforming a model or defining a viewpoint all operations are applied with respect to these axes 102 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SELECTING MODEL PARTS Selecting Model Parts You can select model parts from the Model Tree or from the workspace to highlight them in the Model Tree and on the model You can also select a model part and have all its iden tical parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree You can also configure the Selection Highlight Select Model Parts from the Workspace TASK 1 Select a part or parts on the model in the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To select the parent enti
96. DITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup Drag to move the measured line path 228 Markups CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 8 Click on the measured line path STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFO
97. DITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size 7 Click OK to implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog 8 To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors 9 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree 10 To move the text box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 To resize the text box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace 247 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol lt 3 Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occurrence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note
98. DITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key when selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are enclosed by a three dimensional box Click and hold the mouse button on the sphere at the end of the axis you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The initial mouse movement determines which of the two axes will mark the site of rotation If the axis you selected does not rotate around the right axis for the rotation that you want to make click the sphere again and move the mouse ina different direction Clicking on an axis sphere allows rotation around one of the other two axes Move the mouse to rotate the model by the selected axis ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to rotate the selection freely as done in Rotate Mode press the Control key during rotation To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 2 or from the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manipulate ode STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part
99. EASURING IN 2D FILES 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 4 Click the snapping modes that you want to select as the points for the measure ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information 5 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc 6 From the Arc Info Unit list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 7 From the Measure Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 9 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEPRESULT Thearc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying t
100. Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Edit the information that you want 4 Click OK to close the Establish Hyperlink dialog RESULT The changes are saved Deleting a Hyperlink TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyperlink that you want to delete 200 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink You can also delete the hyperlink by selecting the hyperlink and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard RESULT The hyperlink is deleted Adding Signoff Entities The Signoff entity is an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation You create a signoff entity when the Markup file is finalized NOTE If a markup is modified after a signoff is created the signoff disappears is rescinded from the workspace but remains in the Markup Navigation tree Double click on the signoff entity in the tree to view the signoff history the person who rescinded the signoff the creation date and the drop date TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff Fm 2 Click and drag to create a box on the drawing where you want the signoff STEP RESULT The Sig
101. FILE 3 Enter a file name with a c2t extension then click OK STEP RESULT The new pen setting appears in the Current Pen Settings list 4 Inthe Print Properties dialog click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Deleting a Pen Setting TASK 1 Select the pen setting that you want to delete from the Current Pen Settings 2 Click Delete STEP RESULT The pen setting disappears from the list 3 Click Cancel to close the Print Properties dialog Partial Preview of a File The Partial Print Preview dialog displays the printable area on top of the page area so that users can have a clear idea of what will be printed NOTE Option is only enabled when Current is selected from Document Pages TASK 1 Configure the print properties 2 Click Partial Preview in the Print Properties dialog STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears and highlights the area that will be printed The Paper size Printable Area and Drawing Area are displayed 3 Click OK to close the Partial Print Preview dialog 274 PRINTING PREVIEWING A FILE BEFORE PRINTING Previewing a File Before Printing You can preview a print copy of the current active file on screen according to your printer s capabilities and the print property settings TASK 1 View the file in AutoVue 2 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you
102. Files Markups can be saved as separate Markup files while working with the same document You have the option to add user information to the Markup file save and create separate Markup files with different markup IDs import and export Markup files or change the active Markup file Saved States When you create and save a Markup file with the exception of PDF files the view state of the file is also saved View states include zoom level extents rotation settings transforma tion section plane and visibility When creating markups for 3D files containing imported 185 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES models the imported design becomes part of the view state For EDA files you can save user defined layers sets with markups See Creating a User Defined View State information is also saved with each markup entity For instance if you were at a certain zoom level when you created a markup entity Auto Vue saves the information with the markup entity To Go To the state you were at when you created or modified the markup entity from the Markup tree right click the markup entity and then select Go To NOTE When selecting Go To feature when viewing PDF files Auto Vue highlights the markup entity and preserves the current zoom level Creating a Markup File To create a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that you want to markup 2 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the M
103. Freestyle entity 4 Right click to end the Freestyle entity 208 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Creating a Non Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 or oe we NS From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle De Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity Click a point on the drawing where you want to interrupt the Freestyle entity Click another point on the drawing where you want to restart the Freestyle entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can interrupt the Freestyle entity as many times as you like by repeating steps 4 and 5 Right click to end the Freestyle entity Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes A line segment drawn with the Free Snap snapping mod can be forced to align with the closer horizontal or vertical axis You can also take an existing line segment and have it align with the closer axis The types of line segments that you can align are lines line segments of leaders and polylines and measure entities See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Free Snap TASK 1 To draw and force a line segment press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment 2 To force an existing line segment click and hold the left mouse button on the line se
104. G AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES automatically retrieves the entity information from the server Clear this option if you do not want this behavior every time your mouse hovers over an entity TASK 1 From the tree select EDA 2 Under the Mouse Hover heading select or deselect the Show Entity Information Tooltip option 3 Click OK Modifying 3D View You can configure the board thickness and component height for the 3D PCB view of EDA files Note that these Board Thickness and Component Height values are used only if the underlying EDA file does not contain board thickness and component height information TASK 1 2 From the Configuration tree select EDA Enter a value in the Default Board Thickness field to change the board s thick ness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Board Thickness option only affects boards that have no board thickness defined in the design If a board has a defined thickness this option does not affect that board Enter a value in the Default Component Height field to change the component height ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Component Height option affects components that do not have height defined in the design Ifa component has a defined height this option does not affect that component To work with a different unit of measurement select another unit from the Default Units list This is the unit of measurement used for values set in the Default Board
105. Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key to select multiple logical layers NOTE One physical layer can be selected at a time The Logical Layers section displays a list of logical layers and the layer attribute options you can modify visibility order color and polarity To modify the attributes for both physical and logical layers first select the layers you want to modify and then use the settings to make the changes you want 70 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS When you select physical layers and modify settings from the Layers dialog a message displays at the bottom of the dialog to indicate your last action When you are satisfied with the changes click Apply to make the changes in the workspace You can also create layer sets to save your modified layer settings to reuse them later When you open a file it displays all layer sets for that file You can choose the layer set you need or create your own Changing the Order of Layers You can change the order in which layers display in the workspace Specifically you can change the z order of layers TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers Se ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers Z STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Select the layer or layers that you want to move To do so you can do one
106. N Type Design Rule Check Minimum Drill Hole Size Description Specify the minimum diameter of the drill hole size allowed NOTE Only applicable to rounded pads 10 Maximum Drill Hole Size Specify the maximum diameter of the drill hole size allowed NOTE Only applicable to rounded pads Electrical Maximum Via Count Specify the maximum via count allowed for a net 11 Minimum Route Width Specify the minimum route trace width allowed in the design 12 Maximum Route Width Specify the maximum route trace width allowed in the design 13 Minimum Route Length Specify the minimum route trace length allowed in the design 14 Maximum Route Length Specify the maximum route trace length allowed in the design 15 Empty Nets Select this check box if you want to check for any nets that are not connected to any pin via trace and power ground plane 16 Un routed Traces Select this check box if you want to check for any trace segment that is not connected to another trace segment pin via on either end 87 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Description 17 Single Connection Select this check box if you want to check for a net connected to only one pin NOTE Power and ground nets are the exception 18 Short Circuit Select this check box if you want to c
107. NAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s amp or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator If the Markup Indicator icon does not display the file you opened has no existing markups asso ciated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears 2 From the Markup list select the markup or markups you want to open 3 From the Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active ADDITIONAL INFORMATION An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markups appear in the Auto Vue workspace Changing the Active Markup File When you have multiple Markup files open you can change the active markup NOTE An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree Take one of the following steps In the tree right click the name of the Markup file you want to make active then select Set Active From the Markup toolbar you can set the active markup by selecting a markup from the list on the Markup Properties toolbar Take the following steps From the Markup menu select Set Active The Set Active Markup dialog appears From the Select Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active Click OK to make the selected Markup file active 190 Markups WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Working with Markup Layers Markup files can be divided into layers with each layer
108. NG WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Attributes tab STEP RESULT The attributes of the selected model parts are displayed in a hierarchical tree 5 Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Viewing Mass Properties The Mass Properties tab displays the precise measurements for mass volume area center of gravity moments of inertia and inertia tensor for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to calculate the mass properties To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To view the mass properties of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open the Entity Prop erties dialog 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Mass Properties tab to view the p
109. ORMATION In the Net Area Result group select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas select Subtract to subtract an area from the net area result and select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the region you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in their respective fields in the Area tab Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Area in Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure P STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 52 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points ona drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Option Descriptions All On Select all snapping modes All Off Clear all snapping modes 5 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing
110. Offset and YOffset or enter a scaling factor for the second file TASK 1 While in Compare mode from the View menu select Align and Scale STEP RESULT The Align and Scale dialog appears 2 Select one of the following options Option Description Automatic AutoVue selects the best fit for the two files Select Points to Align Select snapping points to align to Select Points to Align and Select snapping points to align and scale to Scale Custom You can enter a scale factor as well as X and Y offset values XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The align and scale modifications are applied to the file in the second window 4 Click OK to the close the Align and Scale dialog Drawing Information The Drawing Information option is only available with AutoCAD and MicroStation draw ings and is accessed from the Analysis menu The Drawing Information options available are Select Single Entity List Tags Attributes and Entity Information 45 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Viewing Details of a Single Entity The Select Single Entity option allows you to view information of a single entity TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Select Single Entity Click the entity for which you want to view information If you did
111. Open In list select one the following A new applet window Opens the attachment in a new AutoVue window e Current applet window Opens the attachment in the current AutoVue window Associated application Opens the attachment in its associated application 7 Click OK to close the Attach File dialog STEP RESULT The attachment appears on the markup workspace and in the Markup Navi gation Tree 8 Right click in the workspace to complete the attachment Opening an Attachment To open an attachment do one of the following Double click or the attachment icon in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree IfA new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open the attachment in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window 197 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES IfAssociated application was selected while attaching the file it will open in its associated application e Inthe tree right click the attachment entity in the tree select Attachment and then select one of the following Open The attachment opens in AutoVue IfA new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window Open With You have the option to open the attachment with AutoV
112. Oracle AutoVue Desktop Deployment User s Manual ORACLE September 2013 Copyright 1999 2013 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Portions of this software Copyright 1996 2007 Glyph amp Cog LLC Portions of this software Copyright Unisearch Ltd Australia Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM 1986 2012 All rights reserved This software uses ACIS software by Spatial Technology Inc ACIS Copyright 1994 2008 Spatial Technology Inc All rights reserved Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on beha
113. P RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 211 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 5 Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 6 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 7 You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 8 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative 4 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 6 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset
114. Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the selected net Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Show Net Instances You can display the instances of a net in a multi page file TASK 1 From the Navigation Panel click the Nets tab and select the net you want to view STEP RESULT The net is highlighted in the Navigation Panel and in the workspace From the View menu select Go to Net Instances or right click the highlighted net from the Navigation Panel or workspace and select Go to Net Instances STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the instance or instances of the selected net If the selected net appears on multiple pages the Go to Net Instances dialog appears Go to Net Instances Please select a page 3 Select the page on which you want to view the net instance then click OK RESULT The selected page is displayed and the instance of the selected net is highlighted 68 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATING DESIGN HIERARCHY Navigating Design Hierarchy AutoVue supports navigation through the hierarchical structure of a schematic drawing A hierarchical block in a schematic is a symbol that refers to a child schematic Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy With the Ascend Hierarchy option you can navigate from the child schematic to the parent page On the child page of your schematic s design hierarchy select an entity in the works
115. Properties dialog provides information specific to the current active file such as filename file size date of creation and file type The file properties that you can view are Property Tab Description File Properties Information specific to the current active file such as filename file size date of creation file type number of pages and x y amp z dimensions It also indicates if the file is loaded from a streaming file Resource Information Resources specific to the current active file such as text font shape file line style and external reference files Native Properties Custom properties for file types such as last person who saved the file signature verification and author comments DMS If AutoVue is integrated with a backend DMS PLM ERP system a DMS tab appears that lists file attributes retrieved from the backend system NOTE The Properties dialog varies for each file format that is open As a result some property tabs may be absent when viewing a file Viewing File Properties To view file properties TASK 1 From the File menu select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 29 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 2 To view the file properties click the File Properties tab STEP RESULT The File Properties tab displays the file name file size date last modified file type and number of pages the document contains 3 To view resource information click
116. Pulley CAT Part Page 1 3DCatiaS4CPulley CAT Par Solid 0 B Annotation Set 1 Datums Simple Datum Datum Target Solid 0 Dimensions w Click M Set 1 Select the entities from either the tree on the left or the tree on the right ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The tree on the left is the base file and the tree on the right is the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 1 list Click BY Set 2 Select the entities from the other tree that you did not select for Set 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To compare entities from the same file select the entities for Set 1 and Set 2 from either the base file or the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 2 list Click OK STEP RESULT The Compare Tree and the three windows are updated with the set compar ison results To restore the comparison files from the Analysis menu select Compare Files RESULT 139 WORKING WITH 3D FILES GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL The files appear in the three windows Generating a Bill of Material For 3D files you can obtain a list with a count of the parts required for manufacturing the item featured in the file To generate a Bill of Material BOM TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears Bill of Material Count Part Names 3DPROE_BODY PRT 3DPROE_STEM PRT SDP
117. RMATION All attributes tagged as Hidden during Stamp design also display in the DMS Attributes dialog The dialog contains three columns that include attribute values defined in the design stage The Name column displays the attribute name as defined in the design stage It either displays the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system defined attribute name or the user defined name The Value column displays the value that is currently on the Stamp The Value from DMS column displays the value assigned from the backend system 2 To modify any value of the Stamp double click the Value cell corresponding to the attribute If the attribute does not have Edit permissions the value cannot be modified If the attribute is defined as Hidden then the attribute is displayed in the DMS Attri butes dialog You may edit the value of a Hidden attribute but it does not display in the workspace If the attribute is a non constrained list then you may either select a value from the list or enter your own value If the attribute is a constrained list you may only select from the list If the attribute is a multi valued list then you may select a value from the list AutoVue appends this value to any pre existing values using a semi colon as a separator If an attribute is defined with Hidden permissions then the value from the DMS column reflects the value read during Stamp creation It does not reflect the current 218 MARK
118. RMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 Toselect all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 229 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calib
119. ROE_COVER_SEAT_1 PRT S3DPROE_COVER_SEAT_2 PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SEAT_GUIDE PRT 3DPROE_COVER PRT SDPROE_COVER_SCREW PRT 3DPROE_TOP_BALL PRT 3DPROE_BACK_BALL PRT 3DPROE_TOP_SEAT_GUIDE PRT 3DPROE_BACK_SEAT_GUIDE PRT 2 Tosort the list numerically click the Count column header To sort the list alphabetically click the Part Name column header 4 To view a part or parts on the model select the parts from the Part Name column ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree 5 To save the Bill of Material click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 140 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 6 Enter a file name or browse to locate the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values or xml file 7 Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog Entity Search AutoVue allows you to search for entities in a 3D model using the Entity Search dialog Entity Search 3D Search Advanced 3D Search Containing Text Selection All Type All Attribute Filters Definition PMI Filter PMI Type Results Type You can search the whole model or selected entities on the model perform a 3D text search apply attributes entity type
120. STEP RESULT The Consolidate Markups dialog appears 3 Select the markup layers that you want to consolidate into one file To select multiple layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting ADDITIONALINFORMATION To select all the layers click Select All and to deselect all the layers click UnSelect All 4 Inthe Markup ID field enter an ID for the new Markup file If you want to open the newly consolidated markup as the active markup select the Open as Active Markup check box 6 Click OK RESULT The consolidated Markup file is saved If you selected Open as Active Markup the consol idated markup opens and is set as the active markup 195 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Marking up 2D and 3D Files AutoVue provides a number of markup options that display the same behavior when marking up 2D or 3D files You can add markup entities such as attachments hyperlinks signoffs and stamps See 2D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 2D files See 3D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 3D files NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel the action The following tables lists common markup entities for 2D and 3D files Option Attachment Description Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment Y See
121. TH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES In the Comparison Result window results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are Option Color Description View Additions Green Displays parts that are present in the newer file but not in the older file View Deletions Red Displays parts that are missing in the newer file but present in the older file View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change between the newer file and older file Comparing 3D Files The following steps describe how to compare files TASK 1 2 View the newer file From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to compare with the newer file Click Open STEP RESULT AutoVue displays the Compare Tree and three windows The first window displays the newer file the second displays the older file and the third displays the comparison results To view the properties of a modified or moved entity in the newer file and in the older file select the modified or moved amp entity from the tree then right click and select Entity 1 Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the base file Select the entity again then right click and select Entity 2 Properties STEP RESULT The En
122. UPS Option Description Hyperlink Click the workspace to attach a hyperlink From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink Yo See Adding a Hyperlink Measurement Create markup measure entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance a Area 2 Angle Arc amp or Minimum Distance aas f See Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities Note Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note See Adding a Note Signoff Create an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A See Adding Signoff Entities Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities When marking up 3D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted NOTE Ifyou manipulate a part of a model the measure entity values do not update accord ingly AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model In Markup mode you can choose from several measurement options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measure ment to access
123. UPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES value in the DMS ADDITIONALINFORMATION After a change is made to a value cell you must press Tab or Enter to finalize the changes 3 To commit changes to values for backend system attributes click Commit Changes 4 To reset changes and revert to backend system values click Reset When you are done modifying the attributes click OK to finalize your changes and to close the DMS Attributes dialog RESULT The Stamp is updated to reflect any changes you made Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D vector files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized hidden or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can pr
124. Vue has the ability to view many file formats and to create markups for all its readable file formats without the document s authoring application Marking up refers to drawing and writing on an electronic document When you create a markup for a file the markup is created on top of the original file Markups entities are saved in Markup files If a document has existing Markup files the Markup Indicator icon appears in the status bar at the bottom of the AutoVue workspace Clicking the Markup Indicator opens the Markup Files dialog and allows you to select the Markup files to display Markup Files Select Markup File s Name _ jacad2006 002 C jacad2006 001 When you open a Markup file AutoVue layers the markup over the original file In Markup mode you can e Create entities such as text arcs boxes circles clouds lines arrows and polygons Note that AutoVue exits markup creation mode after you create a markup entity In previous releases of AutoVue you were able to continue adding markups until you right click the workspace e Adda stamp or information to an entity by adding a text or a note e Create name and color layers to organize your work 182 MARKUPS MaARrKuP NAVIGATION TREE Create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files Create measurement markup entities that can be moved or resized Note that measurements made in Markup mo
125. Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip 5 Select the vertex ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates appear in the Measurement dialog 6 Click Close the close the Measurement dialog Measuring the Length of an Edge Use the Edge Length option to measure the length of any edge on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Edge Length tab STEP RESULT All edges on the model are highlighted 3 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the edge length ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one edge select Cumulative 4 Click the edge that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The edge length measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 155 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Face Surface Use the Surface option to measure the surface area of an entity face or an entire entity on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Surface tab Select Face
126. a File TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Input area varies according to the type of file For example a word processing file displays the file and format a raster file displays the file path name format and size and vector and database files display the size file type and dimensions STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Inthe Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to save the converted file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If writing on to an existing file the contents of the output file will be overwritten Specify the conversion options 4 Click OK The file is converted and appears in the specified directory ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can convert several selected pages of a multi page file to a multi page TIFF Changing the Pen Settings With AutoVue you can specify a thickness for each pen color when doing a conversion This option only applies to vector files TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Click Pens STEP RESULT The pen Thickness dialog appears 281 CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS 10 In the From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog select the Color Index for which you want to modify the thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one Color Index press the Shift or Control keys while selecting From the Units list
127. aces vertices arcs and so on which are entered manually into the PCB design Mounting hole A hole used for the mechanical support of a PCB or for the mechanical attachment of components to a PCB 286 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Multi layer board Definition A PCB that has multiple layers separated by dielectric material with connectivity between layers established by vias or through holes This term usually refers to a board with more than two layers Net A logical construct circuit that originates in a schematic and is transferred to a board to describe required electrical connections The connections may be completed by using vias tracks or zones Net list List of names of symbols or parts and their connection points which are logically connected in each net of a circuit A net list can be extracted electronically on a computer from a properly prepared schematic Obstacle An outline representing an object on the board It must be taken into account during routing placement or copper pour Pad On a PCB a copper shape on one or more layers there may be a hole and an isolation surrounding the copper used for connecting a component pin to the PCB The pad indicates where pins of a component are placed Padstack A numbered list of pad descriptions Each description contains a pad definition including layer style drill diameter
128. active visualization of 3D models File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Options Help EEA sb G23 DEM AYO 1 BOs Ob a Bookmarks Model g Layout m i gt Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls _ Restore last view Show walkthrough dialog at startup Models Views Bookmarks ED House dwg AutoCAD 2007 2009 100000 Po 3 3 1721664 bytes May 3 2007 In Walkthrough mode you can manipulate the view of a 3D model as if you are walking or flying through the model take measurements of the model and change the camera position and orientation For example when viewing a 3D model of house you can enter the front door and move between rooms and floors All the while you have a 360 degree view of your surroundings and the ability to add markups 157 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Walkthrough Dialog To enter Walkthrough mode from the View menu select Walkthrough The Walkthrough dialog appears Walkthrough Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Pres
129. all square The square is visible only when the anchor point is visible This feature allows you to precisely identify the location of the anchor point and whether the associated entities are visible or hidden 248 Markups WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Nesting Markup Entities You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other markup entites TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a file for example a Box entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Box entity 3 From the Markup menu select Note or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note or Hyperlink Yo RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box parent entity Working with Markup Entities With AutoVue you can assign a markup entity its own color the same color as the current active layer or a custom color You also have the option of grouping markup entities When you group markup entities you can manage the group as you would a single entity In Markup mode there are several options for modifying an entity You can apply these options to selected pre existing entities or to new entities that you add NOTE You can edit certain markup entities after they have been created To do so in the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity and then select Edit Go To a Markup Entity The Go To feature restores the view
130. alog appears 3 Enter the login information and then click OK STEP RESULT The backend DMS system files appear in the File Open dialog 4 Select a file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace 1 ADMS PLM ERP UCM system is referred to as DMS in this document 2 Depending on the type of backend system AutoVue is connected to the button name will change 27 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Searching for Files in a Backend DMS System When AutoVue is connected to backend DMS system you can search for files in the system by entering specific search criteria in the File Open dialog Refer to your integration documentation for more information on logging onto your DMS system TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To sou for a file in the backend DMS system from the left panel click Search DMS Fo ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If AutoVue is configured with a single DMS the name of the DMS appears instead of DMS If AutoVue is connected to multiple backend DMS systems a list of the DMS system names appear when you click Search DMS fF Select the DMS in which you want to perform the search STEP RESULT An authentication dialog appears 3 Enter the login information and then click OK STEP RESULT The search criteria options load in the File Open dialog 4 Enter the search criteria and then click Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Alter
131. alysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT If you are generating a BOM for a schematic with multiple pages a dialog appears prompting you to select the BOM scope Current page or Entire design Generate BOM BOM Scope 2 Click OK after making your selection STEP RESULT The Generating BOM dialog appears listing the attributes of the file Generate BOM Please select attribute s that determine the uniqueness of a component part Attribute Part Type Location Rotation Component Definition Glued Layer Number of Connections Geometry Height i o0po0p00000 Select the attributes that you want to appear in the report 4 Click Generate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sorta column by alphanumerical or alphabetical order click on the column heading STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears listing the count for each component or part possessing the attributes you selected There are also columns displaying the values of the attributes you selected 5 To save the BOM click Export STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears 83 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION 6 Specify the directory where you want to store the file the file name and extension then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can specify either pdx Product Data Exchange or csv Comma Separated Values for the extension STEP RESULT AutoVue automatically saves
132. ange is applied to the entire model 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Color STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears 112 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS 3 Select the desired color 4 Click Apply RESULT The selected part or parts change to the selected color NOTE To set the model color to its default color repeat steps 1 to 2 and click Reset in the Color dialog Adjusting the Transparency You can adjust the degree of transparency of a model This function applies to shaded and shaded wire models as well as reflective and reflective wire TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose transparency you want to adjust 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Transparency ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Transparency i STEP RESULT The Set Transparency dialog appears To adjust the transparency move the slider left or right 4 Select Apply Dynamically if you want the transparency to simultaneously change with the movement of the slider ADDITIONALINFORMATION Alternatively to adjust the transparency level you can enter in the Value field a value from 0 to 1 Where 0 renders the model opaque default state and 1 renders it transparent 5 Click Close to apply the changes and close the Set Transparency dialog Light Settings
133. ant to search by owner select an owner from the Owner Filter list If you want to search by value select a value from the Value Filter list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also enter an Owner Filter or Value Filter in the text box Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONALINFORMATION Select an item in the result list and right click to access options like Zoom Selected and Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear displaying the Owner Type and Value columns To save the results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Measuring in EDA Files In EDA files you can take measurements of distances areas arcs and angles When measuring you have the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure 2 92 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES The following table outlines the available measuring options Name Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points Arc Measure an arc entity Area Measure a selected area Distance Mea
134. ar and includes the most commonly used functions when viewing a file open a file create a new markup print zoom and many others Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the AutoVue toolbar when a 3D file is open 2 7h 2 23 DH AS 4 8 480 8 Se Markup Properties Toolbar The Markup Properties toolbar displays below the AutoVue toolbar when you enter Markup mode It includes the available property and formatting options for the markup entities save markups change font fill type line style and many others The following image shows the default Markup Properties toolbar bel F D unea gt B LTU Aria z l4 z ma a ee Markup Entity Toolbar The Markup Entity toolbar displays by default on the left side of the Auto Vue window when you enter Markup mode It includes all the available markup entities for the opened file 18 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the Markup Entity toolbar when a 3D file is open lt 1 te te SPS ORKAR NOTE The AutoVue GUI can be customized by the system administrator The GUI that is displayed is dependent upon whether it is customized and on the type of customization Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when
135. ar equal with a width of 1 pixel No line weights display for any line Force to Black Select to force all colors of a drawing to black Clear to display the file in color Line Style Select to display dotted and dashed lines Clear to display all lines as solid Filling Select to display filled entities as filled rather than just an outline Clear to hide filling for filled entities Load External References Select to display external references XRefs automatically Clear to keep external references from displaying automatically Raster Files Choose how you want the raster file to display Select Full Resolution to display raster files at full resolution Select Fit to Window to display raster files to fit the current window Rendering When Enable Look Ahead is selected and you zoom into a part of a file AutoVue renders adjacent tiles The advantage to this is improvement in performance when zooming in on parts of a file The disadvantage is that if the client machine is idle for at least one second Enable Look Ahead is triggered which could slow down current operations However once all tiles are rendered all zoom operations speed up again If Enable Look Ahead is deselected Auto Vue renders the tiles when requested that is only when you zoom in on parts of the file Resources If Resolve Local Resources is selected and AutoVue tries to locate XREFs on the client side using client path
136. are also highlighted in the Model Tree Captures The Captures configuration entity displays predefined views TASK 1 Expand the Captures tree to display the defined captures 2 Right click the selected captures and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected capture Reference Frames The Reference Frames configuration entity highlights the grouped PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Reference Frames tree to display the predefined reference frames 2 Right click the selected reference frame and then select Activate RESULT The grouped PMI entities are highlighted in the Model Tree PMI Hyperlinks PMI entities can also include hyperlinks To fire a PMI hyperlink do the following TASK 1 From the Model Tree or workspace double click the PMI hyperlink entity STEP RESULT The 3D Hyperlink dialog appears if there are multiple hyperlinks associated with the selected PMI entity 2 From the 3D Hyperlink dialog select a link and then click Fire RESULT The selected link opens 126 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL Manipulating a 3D Model You can rotate 3D CAD models along a specific axis You can scale a model part up and down as well as translate the model In Manipulate Mode you can resize translate and or rotate selected parts of the model When you select one or more model parts AutoVue displays a m
137. aring 3D File Ssnan annan E EE AA EA ERE 136 Comparing 3D File Sennen aina E E o E E RE SS 137 Comparing Entity SOUS oeseri neei ei aiea E EEE VEE eee EENE aE taai 138 Generating a Bill of Material eesssssssssssseeeseesssssesseeeseessssssssseesceesssssnssesseeeseessnssessseesreeosossssseeereesrssssssesse 140 A ETE E E EAE E OAA E E E 141 Pe rforminga Sea R R ANO RNA 143 Performing a 3D Text S arch ccsssssessssssssssssessssssessesssssssssessnsssessncsacsssssscsssssessnscsecsuceasessesesnseseeasees 144 Performing an Attribute based S arch sccssessssssssessssssssssssessncessssscessssessnscsessusscesseseesnsencesncenees 144 Performing an Advanced 3D Search sesssssssssssssesssssessnssscssssscssscssssnseacssscsecsusssessussasssssscesecseesnseseensess 146 Saving Search RESUItS csin cress eceautivay ovens covssov se aa eae a ERE Naas 147 Measuring in 3D Files s sseesssssssssseseessssssssseseeessessssssesseecseesssssssssosstessossnsssessteesressnsssssseeereeoressssssesseeoresssssesse 147 3D Snapping Modes s minnan ai a e a E a Eia E EE e SEE aait 148 Measuring Distance ciccccesecatve tinsel ettea cues eases e ns naaie rian iaa aaar aa Saaai 149 Calibrating DIStanCe s casssiasseastiassasnsssnieinsiyidindenan nnd ntianoieiieeiabniemasunaes 151 Measuring Minimum DistarnCe csscsccicscsccensccccsescscssntsencassscustscerscesseaeis densstaatecentndhecinaemnaeiaiecs 152 Measuring aN ANg Eins conection fea iheoriteateutnaniemnn uae eae 15
138. arkup Entity column header To display markups based on when they were last modified click the Last Modified tab From the list select one of the following options Anytime Option Description Displays all markup entities Before After Displays all markup entities modified before the selected date Displays all markup entities modified after the selected date 184 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Option Description On Displays all markup entities modified on the selected date Between Displays all markup entities modified between the selected dates In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Last Modified column header To display markups by page location click the Page tab and select one of the following Option Description All pages Displays markup entities on all the pages pag play P pag Current page Displays markup entities on the currently selected pag play P y page Page range Displays the markup entities on the selected page g g play P pag range e To display markups by layers click the Layer tab and select the check box next to the layer or layers To remove a layer from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Layer column header NOTE To remove the filters from the Markup menu select Filter and then select Show All Working with Markup
139. arkup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode and a new Markup file appears in the Markup Navigation Tree See Also Creating a Markup Layer Entering Markup Information When creating a markup you can provide user information that you can save with the markup From the Markup menu select Properties The Markup Information dialog appears Enter a user name department company name company location and telephone number Click OK to save your markup information and to close the dialog 186 Markups WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Saving a New Markup File To save a new Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save ADDITIONALINFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup td STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears displaying the Markup Information that you entered when creating the markup Save Markup File As Markup ID o Markup Information Cancel User Export L Department Company Location Telephone 2 Inthe Markup ID field enter an ID consisting of any combination of characters or numbers 3 Click OK RESULT The Markup file is saved The markups and the Markup file remain displayed in the workspace and in the Markup Navigation tree Opening Markup Files To open a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that has existing markups 187 MARKUPS
140. arts select Use for All Parts 8 To change the display units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respec tive lists in the Display Units section 9 To compute the inertia tensor based on output coordinate system select Output Coordinate System Origin 10 To compute the inertia tensor based on the center of gravity select Center of Gravity 11 Click OK to close the Options dialog STEP RESULT Mass properties are instantly calculated and displayed in the Mass Properties tab When a mass property cannot be calculated N A displays for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 12 To save the changes click Save As STEP RESULT The Save Mass Properties As dialog appears 13 Specify the path where you wantto store the file and enter the file name then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a txt file 14 Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog 122 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Viewing Extents The Extents tab displays the orientation coordinates and center coordinates of the X Y and Z axes as well as the width height and depth measurements for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to view Extents To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To view the Extents of the entire 3D model make sur
141. as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 3 Click Add File STEP RESULT The Please Select an Overlay File dialog appears 4 Selecta file to overlay and then click Open To add another file repeat steps 3 through 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can hide display certain overlays by selecting deselecting corresponding check boxes in the Visibility column 6 When done click OK to close the Overlays dialog RESULT The base file is displayed with the selected overlay files on top of it Modifying an Overlay TASK 1 2 From the Manipulate menu select Overlays STEP RESULT The Modify Overlay dialog appears Select the overlay that you want to modify 40 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Click the Action that you want to apply to the overlay Click Move if you want to move the overlay Click a point on the base file where you want to set the lower left corner of the overlay Click another point where you want to set the upper right corner of the overlay ADDITIONAL INFORMATION As you select the point to define the position of the upper right corner you can resize the destination box Click Scale if you want to resize the overlay Enter the XOffset and YOffset coordi nates and or the Scale Factor ADDITIONAL INFORMATION XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values Click Warp to adjust the overlay Click a point on th
142. atetionnoasennien seen TON NO sE OK SiE ES ON SESVECAN SNEEN ERS 276 CONVETS ON ienn E EE E EE A AE E E AEE giant E E 278 Conversio CLO INS scarce coace a ete eda cecal ad cane ee dae cele aao a tae ace ee and 278 Conv rting a 3D WOE oy sexcosesc cuss cvnvcecunoassonendovdscousveoovesedevyopneossceas aereos svoncsdobargusnnesseneieseses oaussmantaviones 279 2I D PANEER EEE tb adres AA OE E E A aa von Shek AE Sts NE cle 280 DG a in E nets eterna et Rene rain en EN nr EEE Ler nen ord Nene Nm Ett Rn ern ae me 280 Changing the Pen Settings sindia E AEEA E EEA AE A E E E T 281 Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions sesssssssssseesesssssssssosseesssesssssssssteesessnsssssseoseeessessssssesserssessssssssseesres 284 Feedback eienaar na E E E aa r ne a r aS 290 General Nguri ESen aenn A T E EAS iSi 290 ee ELS laO 1I 1 AE EE A A AE A E tao E A 290 Customer Support Preface The Oracle AutoVue User Manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality For the most up to date version of this document go to the AutoVue Documentation Web site on the Oracle Technology Network at http www oracle com technetwork documen tation autovue 091442 html Audience This manual is intended for Oracle AutoVue end users Related Documents For more information see the following documents in the Oracle AutoVue documentation library e Installation and Configuration Guid
143. ault setting 4 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog 3D Views You can display different views of 3D Models or create your own views The following sections provide information on the default view of the model the available camera views native views and user defined views Default View The Default View is the view of the model when it is initially loaded usually it is the view in which the model was saved In cases where there is no saved view Auto Vue loads the isometric view of the model To return to the default view of a 3D model from the View menu select Default View 116 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D Views Setting Standard or Camera Views Rather than entering Rotation mode you can view various predefined rotations with the Camera Views option from View and Markup modes To do so from the View menu select Camera Views and then select the pre defined view you want to display The view options are Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left and Right The model changes to the selected view You can also click the Views tab then click the view from the Standard Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Camera Views Setting Native Views AutoVue displays views for a 3D file as saved in its native application Native views are present only if the file contains saved views From the View menu select Views and then select Native Views The model re orients to the selected view The
144. ave a reflective sheer to the model s shadows 111 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Changing the Render Mode To change the render mode of the selected model or model parts perform the following TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Rendering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Render Mode f STEP RESULT Render mode options are listed 2 Select a render mode from the list STEP RESULT The selected render mode is highlighted RESULT The model or selected model parts change to the selected render mode Changing the Visibility You can choose to show or hide selected parts this can be done from either the Model Tree or the workspace From the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the model part or parts that you want to hide Conversely select the check box beside the model parts that you want to set visible RESULT The selected model parts appear or disappear from the model NOTE You can also hide model parts by selecting them on the model or from the Model Tree then right clicking and selecting Hide Part Selecting Hide Rest displays the selected model parts and hides the rest of the model Changing Model Color You can change the color of a specific model part or selected model parts TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose color you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If no part is selected the ch
145. ball until you achieve the desired lighting To restore the light source to its default setting select Default 6 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog RESULT NOTE You can have a total of eight light sources at a time Changing the Light Properties TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears To change the properties of the light such as color or brightness right click directly on the small ball and select Light Properties STEP RESULT The Light Property dialog appears 115 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D Views 3 Select a color from the Color menu ADDITIONALINFORMATION You can drag the Brightness and Specularity slide bars to modify the brightness of the source and the brightness of the model s reflection to light respec tively 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the light properties to its default setting select Default STEP RESULT The light properties modifications are applied 5 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Removing a Light Source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 Right click directly on the small ball that you want to remove and select Remove Light STEP RESULT The small ball disappears and the light change is reflected You can also select Default to restore the lighting properties to its def
146. be internal to the file like layers and blocks External reference files XRefs are located outside the file 38 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Use the XRefs option to display the external references of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select XRefs STEP RESULT The Select the External References to Display dialog appears listing the external reference files associated with the current active file 2 You can modify the visibility of the XRefs by doing one of the following Deselect select the Status check box beside the XRef that you want to hide display Click All On to display all the XRefs or click All Off to hide all the XRefs Select a XRef from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide display the XRef ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Raster XRefs cannot be toggled on off for AutoCAD and MicroSta tion drawings 3 Click OK to close the Select the External References to Display dialog RESULT The selected XRefs are displayed Displaying Details About Resources Resource information for a file is displayed in the left of the AutoVue status bar Ifa file is missing resources the Missing Resource icon appears to the left of the AutoVue status bar These missing resources can be XRefs text fonts linestyles or shape files If a missing resource has been substituted for another resource the Substituted Resource icon appears
147. brate the distance measurement TASK 1 2 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Minimum Distance Use the Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between two nets TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure hana STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Min Distance tab To measure the minimum distance between entities that are not on the same physical layer select Across Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If a physical layer does not exist this option determines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers 95 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 10 11 12 Select First Set EJ to select the entities that you want to measure from Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the entities for th
148. can also click Arrow Style S Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Arrow Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new arrow style Changing Fill Type TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill type 255 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Type 1 Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Type STEP RESULT The Fill Type dialog appears 3 From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color 4 Click OK RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type Changing Fill Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill color 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color L Alternatively ri
149. ce Normal Select a face on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the face From Edge Tangent Select an edge on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the edges tangent Define a Plane Define X Y and Z coordinates to orient the section plane Cut Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following cut options to define the cut through of an object Option Description Don t Cut Display the object without a cut Cut Object displayed is cut along the section plane 132 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Option Description Invert Reverse the selection display the other part of the object Show Both Restore the cut part of the object Edges Only Display only the edges of the object along the section plane Defining the Section Plane and Cut through TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Section and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Sectioning if STEP RESULT The Define Section dialog appears 2 From the Section Plane list select the orientation for the section plane From the Cut Options list select the cut option that you want 4 To define the plane position click and drag the Plane Position slider to the posi tion you want Select Dynamic if you want the plane to move simultaneously with the slider 6 Select Show Plane
150. ck Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Angle tab 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Angle in Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure bach STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab 3 From the Angle Definition section select one of the following From 3 Points Measure the angle between three points Between 2 Lines Measure the angle between two non parallel lines 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information 6 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle 54 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 9 10 If you selected Between 2 Lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement
151. connected to a pin pad on the same net Minimum Clearance Trace gt Trace Specify the minimum trace to trace clearance on the same physical layer NOTE Does not take into account directly connected traces 85 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Minimum Clearance Component gt Component Description Specify the minimum component to component clearance on the same physical layer component top side or component bottom side NOTE Only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is considered A component entity is usually made up of geometries on different logical layers silkscreen keepout and so on but only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is considered Manufacturing Minimum Annular Ring Specify the minimum distance between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers NOTE The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers Minimum Pad Diameter Specify the minimum diameter of a pad NOTE Only applicable to rounded pads Acute Angle in degrees Specify the minimum acute angle between connected traces on the same physical layer NOTE Only two traces belonging to the same net are considered 86 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATIO
152. creens keepouts keepins and assembly drawing data and text documenting the footprint information for example the component name You may want each project to have its own footprint library containing all the footprints used in that project Ground plane A large area on the PCB usually an entire layer that provides a common ground connection for all component ground pins and other ground connections Heatsink A mechanical device made of a high thermal conductivity material that dissipates heat generated by a component or assembly Heuristics A method of routing that consists of repeated attempts to apply very simple routing patterns to unrouted connections in order to complete the routing quickly and cleanly Typically heuristics are used for memory and short point to point routing Hole The area where board material must be removed by drilling or milling Isolation The clearance around a pad track zone or via that defines the nearest approach allowed by conductors of another signal set Jumper wire A discrete electrical component or wire used to make electrical connections between points that have no copper etch due to board density or some other factor Keepout An area fill within which no routing is allowed Land The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Layer The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Manual routing Individual connections in the form of tr
153. d Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in their respective fields in Distance tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 50 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Distance in Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure P STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off oe W From the Measured Distance Units list select the units of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumula tive 6 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement
154. d date properties Status Bar When in View mode or Markup mode the status bar is located at the bottom of the main window The fields displayed from left to right on the status bar are marker current active filename file type zoom factor current page and total number of pages current active file size file creation date and cursor s coordinate position The following image shows the status bar gt acadi2 dwg AutoCAD Version 12 65 Pg2 2 pe449bytes fun i4 2004 1 312 24 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES There are three markers that may be present on the status bar the Markup Indicator icon indicates associated markups the Missing Resource icon indicate missing resources and the Substituted Resource icon indicates substituted resources The Markup Indicator indicates that the current active file has associated markups While in View mode click the Markup Indicator icon to view the Markup Files dialog then select a Markup file or group of Markup files to open The Missing Resource icon amp indicates that some main resources required to properly display the current active file are not available To identify the missing resources click the Resource icon to display the Properties dialog The Substituted Resource icon indicates that if a required resource is missing AutoVue has replaced it with another resource To identity the substituted resources click the Substi tuted Resource icon to d
155. de have up to a 1 margin of error Navigate markups through a hierarchy tree view markup properties and sort the tree according to each property View markup layers individually or in combination When in Markup mode you can press Shift Left Mouse button to select multiple markups entities in order to drag or copy and paste to a new location e Press Esc at any point to cancel the markup creation Markup Navigation Tree When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups Markup Entity 4 Untitled2 Al Text Xi Leader bnb Highlight O Box Line Last Modified A Page Laver JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 06 M 1 0 JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 08 AM 1 0 JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 AM 1 0 JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 24 AM 1 0 JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 29 AM 1 0 JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created Author The name of the user who created the markup entity Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was
156. defined click the Views tab and select it from the User Defined Views tree or select Views select User Defined Views NOTE You can also alternate between User Defined Views and Standard Views without affecting your personalized views Deleting a User Defined View TASK 1 Under the User Defined Views tree select the view that you want to delete then right click and select Delete STEP RESULT A confirmation prompt appears 2 Click Yes RESULT The view disappears from the tree Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model The Perspective option shows objects in three dimensions with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth that reflects the desired perspective to the eye NOTE You can use the Perspective option in any of the 3D Views since it is a projection mode rather than a view point From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Perspective The depth of the model changes 118 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D Views Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point To view a model from a particular point you can specify a view point TASK 1 From the View menu select Camera Views and then select View Points ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Camera Views and then select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears Enter the coordinates for X Y and Z a In the Camera Position
157. diameter ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 225 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities When marking up EDA files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on
158. e Viewing Configuration Guide Release Notes e Supported Formats List Product Variations Feature Matrix 12 PREFACE CONVENTIONS Conventions The following text conventions are used in this document Convention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter 13 Introduction Oracle s AutoVue suite of enterprise visualization solutions provides native document viewing markup and real time collaboration capabilities that enable Web based document review on hundreds of native document types including 2D 3D CAD EDA Office and graphic formats AutoVue enterprise visualization solutions address the challenge of accessing reviewing and collaborating on documents both internally and with globally dispersed teams and partners in a secure and reliable manner without compromising secu rity or precision Improved team productivity reduced errors and accelerated innovation and time to market are just a few of the business benefits organizations can expect to achieve This manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you ge
159. e Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snap ping modes 149 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment connecting segment connecting segment connecting points the point and the the point and the the point and the line arc plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line and Distance between the plane NOTE The lines must the line and arc axis n be parallel NOTE The line must be parallel to the plane Arc Center Distance between Distance between the axes of the arcs the arc axis and the lane NOTE Arc planes P must be parallel NOTE The plane and the arc plane must be perpendicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE The planes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Distance tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT
160. e face is highlighted Re Centering a Model to an Entity To re center a model to an entity perform the following TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Entity STEP RESULT The Re Center dialog appears 2 Select the entity that you want to use as the central reference point STEP RESULT All instances of the entity are highlighted 3 Click an instance of the entity STEP RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected entity as the central reference point 4 Close the Re Center dialog Model Tree The Model Tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies bodies and missing XRef notifications With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation 105 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Expanding Collapsing the Model Tree You can expand the Model Tree to display child entities of a selected node or nodes You can also configure the level you want to expand the Model Tree TASK 1 2 Click the Models tab From the Model Tree select the node or nodes that you want to expand then right click and select Expand All Children ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one node press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected entities are highlighted The Model Tree expands displaying the child entities of the select
161. e file Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files The Cross Probe option lets you select entities in the schematic drawing or the PCB design to highlight in all the open files TASK 1 Openan EDA file to cross probe 2 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears 3 Click Add File 78 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING 4 Inthe Open dialog that appears enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to cross probe then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add multiple files to the Cross Probe dialog repeat steps 3 and 4 When adding multiple files from the same directory press Shift while making your selection 5 Click OK STEP RESULT Each file you select appears in a new window A dialog appears for each new window which lets you change the view or page for each file Each dialog has the Auto matic option selected by default When the Automatic option is selected for each dialog you see different behavior depending on the files you cross probe 6 Ifyou cross probe a schematic and PCB one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a schematic The same is true if either file contains a PCB anda schematic Whereas if files A and B contain both a schematic and a PCB and they are cross probed one of the files displays the schematic page and t
162. e file path For example C samples results in browsing one subdirectory below samples Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears To change the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you want it in the list 165 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS 8 To remove a path select the path and click Remove 9 Click OK to close the Configuration dialog Configuring Font Paths Font Paths are the directory paths for fonts required by 2D 3D EDA or PDF files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Font Paths 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears 3 Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external font files are located ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two asterisks at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing all subdirectories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing one subdirectory below samples 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears 5 To change the order select the path
163. e measure ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you click Net N you cannot select any other type of entity See EDA Snapping Modes Click the first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted Select Second Set aj to select the entities that you want to measure to Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom into the measurement on the drawing Click Compute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue does not measure the distance between layers z dimen sion STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is repre sented by a line The minimum measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure Min Distance section of the dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure k STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Area tab Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawin
164. e no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open the Entity Prop erties dialog 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Show Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Extents tab You have three extents options a Select Transformed if you want to view the extents after you have transformed the model b Select UnTransformed if you want to view the extents of the model without trans formation c Select Oriented if you want to view the X Y and Z coordinates of the reoriented model or selection 6 Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog File Properties The File Properties tab provides file related properties of the selected entity such as author date of creation keywords title and so on To view the file properties select a part or the whole model and then select Analysis and then Show Entity Properties From the Entity Properties dialog appears click the File Properties tab 123 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Entities A 3D file s Product and Manufacturing Information PMI is composed of annotations that are included in design files These annotations indicate the limits and constraints that
165. e overlay and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay starting point Click another point and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay to end ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The overlay s size is scaled to accommodate the origin and desti nation points you defined Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify other overlays repeat steps 2 to 4 STEP RESULT The changes are applied to the selected overlay Removing an Overlay TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 2 Select the overlay that you want to remove 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The overlay is removed from the list 4 Click OK RESULT The overlay is removed from the display 41 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Selecting Views The Views option allows you to access different named views of a file TASK 1 From the View menu select Views STEP RESULT The Select a Named View dialog appears 2 From the list select the view that you want to display 3 Click OK RESULT The selected view is displayed NOTE To return to the default view select Default View Specifying a View Point The View Point option allows you to render a drawing from a selected viewpoint TASK 1 From the View menu select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears 2 Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the view point with which you want to render
166. e pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the available snapping modes Button Snap To Description S End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the entity s end point a Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear entity Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an entity 227 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Button Snap To Description Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Le Via Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via gii Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a component Dx Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing IZ Net Allows snapping to a net S Trace Allows snapping to a trace Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance AD
167. e the Configuration dialog Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files You can configure background color snap and overlay extents settings for 2D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears Select 2D in the tree STEP RESULT The 2D options appear 167 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES Snap Settings In measurement mode when you move the cursor within a predetermined snap radius the snap box appears for the entity to be selected To change the snap radius change the value in the Snap Radius field The snap radius is configured in pixels NOTE You must restart the Auto Vue client for the configuration to take effect Overlays Extents Settings When you add overlays AutoVue automatically tries to scale the overlay extents to match the base file extents If you wish to disable this behavior clear the Match Extents checkbox in the Overlays section of the 2D Configure dialog Configuring Colors The Colors settings let you modify colors for 2D files From the tree expand 2D and then select Colors to display the following options Background Option Measurement Description Change the color of the background for 2D files Modify the color you want displayed when taking measurements on 2D files 168 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files
168. e the Mockup dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Once open you can position these models in the desired manner using the Transformation tool RESULT The file or files you imported appear in the workspace See Transforming a 3D Model Deleting Models from a Mockup The following steps explain how to delete models from a mockup TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears Select the file or files that you want to remove Click Remove STEP RESULT The file or files are removed from the list Click OK to close the Mockup dialog RESULT The file or files disappear from the workspace 108 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Manipulating Display of a 3D Model AutoVue provides the flexibility to manipulate the display of a 3D model You can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file You can access these options from the View menu The options are Menu Sub Menu Description Zoom Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Previous Return to the previous zoom level From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Selected Resiz
169. e the object so that the objects selected fill the window Dynamic Zoom Click and drag the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out From the Autovue toolbar you can also click at Zoom Box Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click E or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Zoom Fit Resize object to fit window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click BI or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Pan Click and drag to reposition the model then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click C or right click in the workspace and then select from the menu Rotate Click and drag to rotate the model on all three axes then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click lt gt or right click in workspace and then select from the menu 109 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Spin Menu Sub Menu Description Click and drag the object in the direction you want the object to spin continuously then release mouse button To stop the object from spinning click once anywhere in the workspace The spin velocity is determined by the speed at which you drag the mouse From the Autovue toolbar you can also click S Re Center All Reposition the entire model back to the center of
170. e to hide all items 5 Click OK to close the PMI Filtering dialog RESULT Only items selected in the Tree column are displayed in the Model Tree Only items selected in the View column are visible on the 3D model Visibility settings are saved and will be restored the next time you open the PMI filtering dialog NOTE AutoVue supports default PMI visibility as saved in the file To restore default PMI visibility click Default in the PMI Filtering dialog Aligning to a PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to align to and select Align To AutoVue aligns to the selected PMI item Go to a Displayed PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to go to on the model and select Go To AutoVue zooms to the selected PMI item PMI Configuration Entities The Views Captures Reference Grouping entities refer to specific configurations of the model These PMI configuration entities are listed in the Model Tree and are activated by right clicking the entity and then selecting Activate Views The View configuration entity displays predefined views and highlights associated PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Views tree to display the defined views 2 Right click the selected view and then select Activate RESULT 125 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected view The PMI entities
171. ect Re Center and then select Selected RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected model part or parts as the central reference point The Selected option is only available when one or more model parts are selected Re Center All The Re Center All option repositions the entire model back to the center of the AutoVue workspace TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select All STEP RESULT The model is repositioned to the center of the workspace Entity Reference You can use an entity as a central reference point to reposition a model The entities are as follows Entity Description Vertex All vertices are highlighted Select a vertex to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over a vertex 104 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Entity Edge Description All edges are highlighted Select an edge to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an edge Midedge Highlight all edges in the model Select a mid edge to use as the central reference point Arc Center Highlight all arcs and ellipses in the model Select an arc center to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an arc or ellipses indicating the center of the arc Face Select a face to use as the central reference point When moving the cursor along a model face th
172. ected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model You can reset a model or selected parts to their original transformation TASK 1 2 View the transformed 3D Model To reset the entire model to its original transformation from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset All 130 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL 3 To reset selected model parts to their original transformation from the Manipu late menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also reset selected model parts To do so from the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the parts in the Transformation column E RESULT The model or selected parts are reverted back to their original transformation Transforming a Model by Setting Values TASK 1 SNA Rw 10 11 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Transform amp STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To rotate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To translate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To view a mi
173. ectivity RESULT The net connectivity for the entity or entities that you selected are highlighted in all the files Zooming when Cross Probing When you are cross probing files you can zoom in on the entities you select Zoom in on a selected entity or entities e When cross probing between a schematic drawing and a PCB design When cross probing between the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in either one of the open files or views ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are cross probing between a schematic drawing or a PCB design you can select entities in either file You can also select entities in any open view when cross probing the 2D view and 3D view of the same file 2 Right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the same entities in all the open file or views See Also Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing for more information 81 WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPARING A PCB WITH ARTWORK Comparing a PCB with Artwork You can visually compare PCB designs with artwork In Compare mode for EDA files EDA options such as Select Entity Entity Search dialog and Entity Filter are available NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison TASK 1 Open the PCB file that you want to compare with the artwork 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 3 En
174. ed nodes To collapse a node select the node then right click and select Collapse All Chil dren STEP RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node You can also expand a node by clicking t To collapse a node click amp Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon If the loaded drawing is missing XRefs the Missing XRef Notification icon appears in the Model Tree to the left of the missing XRef To view XRefs are missing do the following See Also Displaying Details About Resources TASK 1 From the status bar click the Missing Resource icon 3 STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears You can also view the missing XRef from the File menu and then selecting Properties Click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT Any missing XRefs appear in the External Reference File Reference File Resources section of the dialog and are preceded by a Click OK to close the dialog 106 WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree TASK 1 2 Click the Models tab Select the part or parts from the Model tree ADDITIONAL NFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree Hiding Model Parts You can hide specific parts of a model or display specific part
175. ees 69 Navigating using Descend Hierarchy cssssscsscsscssccssecssecsccssecssccuccescessecenscssecscessesseesnscescerseeseees 69 baye Sinesi monst Teenaa E S iaei E a E D E aE 70 Physical and Logical Layers Sections s ssesssssessesseseoseeeteereereereeereereeseersereeesereesrroresrrsreseessesessesss 70 Changing the Order of Layers ssesssesesssessessesssssssssnssnsssssnssnssnssssssssenseuseuneeseenseneeneeseeseeeeeereereeeeeeeeeeee 71 Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers sessssscssecsccssecssesssecsecsecssccsccssecsscesseessccncesseesuecsnceesseseees 72 Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers essssssssssscsecssecssccsseesscessscssesuscssccsscesscessccssccsscensesssesseess 72 PAGING POL ACOY eestitsi in ees oe ELE aese EE EEEa a e Ea ieoa 73 Changing bayer O OOE a a TEE ENNI R 73 S rti ng L gical AYERS i scissssassesscennsccssedaccnssouscesicusdene cevsac ans caster te qaceuaeb tsia iisisti osrin 74 tayer SOUS canina a a cons havmsais N E aa NE EO EO ounssndiols Gave 75 Viewing Layer Sets auaina a vacant aE A A AA e T REAN 75 Creating User Defined Layer Sets sssssssssecssscssecssecssccssssssssccsseessecssccsseesscesscessessscencceseesecsecenseess 75 Deleting User Defined Layer Sets ssssssccssscsscsnscssscssscnssensesssssnscensesssssnscnscensscnscensessssenscensesseesnees 76 Saving User Defined Layers Sets With Markups sssssesserseresresersereerserseereserereesrsressessrssessesssss 77 Manip
176. el You can also adjust the degree of transparency change color or visibility to suit your preferences Render Modes The choice of render mode varies between the level of detail and the render speed of the model For example a shaded model is three dimensional and highly detailed but requires more time to render The different render modes are as follows Method Wireframe Description A skeletal model constructed using lines and curves that represent the model s true edges All internal lines are visible Shaded A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Hidden Line A wireframe constructed with all internal lines hidden Silhouette A wireframe constructed with all internal lines visible but including additional silhouette edges These are not true edges but help to visualize the model Wire Polygons A skeletal model constructed of unfilled polygons Shaded Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Reflective A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are have a reflective sheer to accentuate the model s shadows Reflective Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces h
177. elected is the root of the tree and all the associated entities grouped by their type are shown as its children The attributes of the entity display to the right of the tree under Entity Info In the tree select any associated entity to display its attributes under Entity Info You can also view entity attributes in the workspace When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with commonly used entity information appears You can turn these tooltips off or on from the Configuration dialog See Configuring AutoVue for more information on the Configuration dialog Viewing the Properties of an Entity The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design TASK 1 Select the entity in the workspace or from the Navigation Panel or Entity Search dialog 66 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Right click and select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also double click the entity in the workspace to view its entity information STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog displays the selected entity and its associated entity Select any associated entity in the tree to display its attributes To view all associated entities for any given entity in the tree select the entity and click Expand ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To view the entity properties for the previous entity click the back arrow
178. ereesrssss 118 Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model ssssssssssssssesssssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssss 118 Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point s sssssssssssseecseesssssssssesseeessssssssesseeesseossssesseeeseee 119 Configuring Layerseoi senrose nsee aan eain eaaa ae etase ee n dente sieve atta 119 E tity PrOpertieS ccssctnscesesiasescasuzodcaaanvasnsoasnanasaxcavensovagnieasgnssbissiaasncsivasenndenaeaveadundenavas aunoa civdoasbaseanovas AEREN oS 120 General AttribUteS en sne aakrit eea EEES EEEE n i i Eiss 120 Viewing Attribute Sssnesen eriin siia aE E Seaia es buudias EEE ST EE StS 120 Viewing Mass Properties esssesssseessssessssecsssscsssscesssceessceeessseeossseoosseeossesossseossserossceroseerssseressseeesseees 121 Configuring Mass PFODEM IES 52 cnchusetrassernscrarectinsrtennninmnciennmanmiaienitenatomradinans 122 Viewing EXCONES orinni a i taeda ER A RRE R aTa S 123 AEA ALe OLA E EE T E AAE EAN E ENE E E AE O E E EE 123 PMI Entiti E sciecycivex olssannstonaso cess amne cs eevsonsa choy sa n E N EOE E E R S 124 PMEFilterihg maena nann a n a E R RA 124 Aligning to a PMI ENT Y isssissisiissieriuneasserrasi ioter naar n ie ieni eaa ni 125 GONG a Displayed PMI Entity ssnin a aa aias 125 PMI Configuratiom ENTITIES seserinis ea a e e iA EEs 125 PIV SFIS Ss sects ste e E NAE A A E A OER 126 Manipulating a 3D Model ssssssssseesssssssssesseeesessnsssesseecseesssssssssosstesssssnsssssseeeseessess
179. ess the Escape key to cancel In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2i 219 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Arc Option Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Description Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area im aa Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance s5 Il 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity acl Button Snap to Description ar End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Ce
180. fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the camera lens b In the Target Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the 3D model viewed through the camera lens c In the Up Direction fields change the coordinates to values between 0 and 1 to determine the upward orientation Click OK to close the View Point dialog RESULT The entity moves to the defined view point The Global axes and the User Coordi nates System change position to reflect the view point Configuring Layers Use this option to configure which layers to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears and lists the layers and layer visibility for the current active file To sort the list of layers in the dialog click the Name column header to sort alpha betically or numerically or click the Status column header to group by visibility Select the check box beside the layers that you want to display Deselect the check box beside the layers that you want to hide Click OK to close the Select the Layers to Display dialog RESULT The selected layers are displayed 119 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Entity Properties You can view properties such as visibility color transparency mass properties and extents of a model or model parts General Attrib
181. for distance and minimum distance Button Description Behavior Vee E Highlights vertices on the A snap box appears when you hover the mouse pointer model over a vertex Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted when you hover the mouse Bee ne ar i A d i NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating Q model the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer 239 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Button Arc OY Description Highlights arcs on the model Behavior The arc is highlighted when you hover the mouse pointer Arc Center Highlights arcs and circles on the model The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane B Highlights faces when you move the cursor over a face The face is highlighted when you hover the mouse pointer Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types NOTE To revert to the Point to Point di
182. g The snapping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 96 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure lal STEP RESULT The Meas
183. g entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance Button Vertex Description Highlights vertices on the model Behavior A snap box appears when you hover the mouse pointer over a vertex Edge Line es Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted when you hover the mouse model pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlights edges on the The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating Q model the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer ArcA Highlights arcs on the The arc is highlighted when you hover the mouse model pointer 148 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Button Description Behavior Highlights arcs and circles The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears indicating Arc Center f on the model the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane a Highlights faces when you The face is highlighted when you hover the mouse move the cursor over a pointer face Measuring Distance Use th
184. ght click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Color STEP RESULT The Fill Color dialog appears 3 From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity a x ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer chap ss the markup entity color to the color of the layer it is on and selecting Line Color I assigns the same color as the markup entity s line 4 To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color Y From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities 6 Click OK to close the Fill Color dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color 256 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to assign the color of the layer that they belong to 2 Toassign the line color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Color The Line Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alter natively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Color From the Line Color list select Bylayer Z 3 To assign the fill color From t
185. gment then press and hold the Shift key 3 When you see that the line segment is horizontal or vertical release the left mouse button then release the Shift key Adding a Leader TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Leader ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leader Ge 2 Click a point on the document where define the Leader anchor point 209 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 3 Move the cursor to draw the Leader ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To draw a Leader segment and force it to be aligned to the closest axis vertical or horizontal hold the Shift key while moving the cursor 4 To draw a Leader with multiple line segments repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as you like You can click then drag as often as you like Right click to end the Leader A text box appears at the end of the Leader 6 In the text box enter the text you want to attach to the Leader STEP RESULT The height of the text box will resize to fit the entered text 7 To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size 8 Click OK to implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog 9 To change the line p
186. grouped under Common PCB and 3D View as follows Common Option Description Background Set the background color for all views except the PCB 3D view and file types Selection Set the color when selecting an entity 178 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES PCB Option Min Distance Set 1 Description Set color for the first minimum distance set Min Distance Set 2 Set color for the second minimum distance set Plated Drill Hole Set color for plated drill holes The default color is black To override the native color select Override Native Color NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Non plated Drill Hole Set color for non plated drill holes The default color is black To override the native color select Override Native Color NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only 3D View Option Default Board Color Description Configure the color of the board in 3D view Default Component Color Enhanced Display Options Configure the component color in 3D view You can configure the following enhanced display options for EDA files 179 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR GRAPHIC FILES Main Menu Display Options Option Plated Hole Visibility Description Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off the plated hole visibility NOTE Applicable
187. h that you want to measure STEP RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 7 Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 221 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 Toselect all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point Con
188. he Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Color The Fill Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color From the Fill Color list select Bylayer A 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities change to the color of the layer that the entity belongs to Changing Font You can change the font of the text box leader and measurement entities TASK 1 Create the markup entity that you want 2 From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity for which you want to modify the font then do one of the following From Markup menu select Format and then select Font The Font dialog appears From the lists select the font font style and font size You also can 257 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES select to add a strikeout and underline by selecting their check boxes Click OK to the close the dialog and implement the changes From the Markup Entity toolbar select the font font size and font style bold italic and underline from their respective lists and buttons The font changes are imple mented Changing Measurement Units and Symbols You can change the unit of measure and add a symbol to a measurement and have it appear on the drawing TASK 1 2 Create the markup measure entity that you want Double click the measurement that you want to change the unit of measure or add
189. he current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Click and drag the frame handles to enlarge the value box To remove the highlighted vertices on the model click Close in the Measurement Entities dialog With AutoVue you can add a 3D text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text F The Attach To dialog appears and provides six snapping options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 246 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Description None Does not snap to the model Vertex Snaps to a vertex on the model Edge Snaps to an edge on the model Face Snaps to a face on the model Mid Edge Snaps to the middle of an edge on the model Ar Center Snaps to the center point of an arc on the model 3 To inserta text box that snaps to a part of the drawing with a leader line select one of the snapping modes 4 Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The height of the text box will change to accommodate the text 6 To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font AD
190. he diameter of the arc 6 Click three points on the drawing to define the arc you want to measure STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path arc measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 215 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Creating a Stamp NOTE In previous releases of AutoVue Stamp markup entities were called Intellistamp The Stamp markup entity lets you create a stamp that includes document and user infor mation metadata pulled directly f
191. he measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 56 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 57 Working with EDA Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue also provides intelligent querying for EDA files you can create modify layer sets generate BOM perform intelligent measurements analyze nets and components set enhanced display options and global transparency and much more For information on the available features for EDA files refer to the following sections Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design NOTE To hide or display the Navigation Panel click ip The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic draw
192. he other displays the 2D PCB 7 Ifyou cross probe two PCBs one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a 3D PCB If you cross probe two schematics both are set to schematic To change the view of a file in a window do the following a Deselect the Automatic option in the dialog for the window you want to change b From the Type list select Schematic PCB or PCB 3D View These options are avail able in the Type list only when the views are present in the file STEP RESULT The view of the file changes in the window 10 To switch between multiple occurrences of a selected component do the following a From the Navigation Panel select a component in one file that has multiple compo nent occurrences in the other file b From the dialog of the file with multiple component occurrences select one of the components from the Occurrences list or click Next or Previous to switch between component occurrences Chapter 6 scm Scope Automatic Type Occurrences Counter NET19 11 Select any entity in the schematic drawing RESULT 79 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING The same entity is highlighted in the PCB design Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File The Cross Probe option lets you select entities to highlight in the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Au
193. he range Size You can set the size and units pixels inches and millimeters of the output file With raster files the units are preset as pixels X indicates the number of horizontal pixels Y is the number of vertical pixels for the current active file contents At times AutoVue will preset X and Y to match the specifications of the selected conversion file format Other times X and Y will be available and may be changed according to your preferences Your selection here will not affect the current display but will affect the conversion file s resolution Scale Set the scale percentage of the converted page DPI You may set the dots per inch DPI for the converted page Converting a 3D Model TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Inthe Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to convert the file to then enter a file name 3 From the Convert to Format list select the format you want to convert the file to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Output and Convert area options change according to the type of format you choose 279 CONVERSION PDF 4 Select the output and convert options that you want to set for the file 5 Click OK RESULT The Conversion in Progress dialog appears The dialog disappears when the file is converted successfully PDF With AutoVue it is
194. heck for intersections on the same layer of traces that belong to different nets NOTE Trace entities will be divided into n sets where n is the number of nets in the design 19 Unconnected Pin Select this check box if you want to check for any pin pad that is not graphically intersected with any traces on the same physical layer Verifying a Design The following steps describe how to verify a design TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Verify Design STEP RESULT The Verify Design dialog appears To enable a design rule select the associated check box in the Design Rules section of the dialog To disable a design rule deselect the check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can sort the design rules by clicking the column headings for Enabled Description or Value To add a value to the selected design rule double click the corresponding row of the Value column and enter a value ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The selected design rule must be enabled to be able to add a value 88 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION 5 Inthe Maximum Violations field enter the maximum number of results you want to display in the Results list 6 From the Distance Units list select the unit you want to use as the unit of measure Click Verify ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Verify button changes to Stop To stop the Design Verification process at any point click Stop When the process
195. hoose which markup layers to make visible so that they can print With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time When printing a file there are print properties that you can define From the File menu select Print to display the following properties Option Description Print Define the print options See Print Options Margins Define the margin settings See Print Margins Headers Footers Define the headers footers to be included on every page printed See Header Footer Watermark Define the watermark to be included on every page printed See Watermarks Pen Settings Change the thickness assigned to a pen See Assigning Pen Settings Print Options With the Options tab you can define print options for the printed file The options are 264 PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Printer Option Modify Description Select a printer and configure print properties such as paper size number of copies and so on Paper size Displays selected paper size This option also allows you to modify the paper size Orientation Portrait Specify if file should be printed portrait Landscape Specify if the file should be printed landscape Auto Specify if orientations should be printed as saved in the file Units From the drop down list set the unit for Scaling and Alignment Offset The ava
196. ieis aan naiacatae 200 Adding Signoff ENTITIES sessista Enn aE r E a a r 201 R scinding the SION Of sisinio ER R REN Nn 202 R Approving a SIGIION sesine osise es E EEEE i aE mon Ea ESSES ESES 202 Viewing the History of a Sign Off cece arate eniinn ais 202 Addi ga Symbolism annan anannaa n aaaeei suea uristi eaulenaastachasisebsanecaues 203 Creating a New Symbol Library ssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssessessessessosseeseseoecoseeseeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeereereeeeerereereees 205 Deleting a Symbol Library s sssessssssssessessesseseosceereereereeeterteeseeeeeeeeseeereeresreeresresrrsrssessnssessnssnsssssssssss 206 DUDS CITC Mak DS e a erreina e E E I n A e oaie cece E ES 206 DUD VAT UME TUE 55 soz bas aol na E E O NSS 206 Adding a Freestyle Entity s e0oooosoossesoososooeeoseoeeeeeeseeeereereeetereeereeeeeereeeeersseeeeeerrerrsrssessessessnssnssssesss 208 Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal AX6S sessssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssessesse 209 Addi galead r cf sas datusnsasutanessnniceinicasnangoumumenGuaninusnikaniabaniieamnngieas 209 Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities ccsessecssscseessssscssnsssccssssecsssssessncseeessesees 210 Greating a Sta Pinasan an a A a CARA EE ain nude a E 216 Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities sseessssseeesessssssssssceseesssssssseoeseeesssssnssesseerssessnsssssseesees 219 2D Vector Snapping Modes sesssssssssssseeessesssssssstecseessssssssses
197. ilable units are pixels inches and millimeters Scaling Fit to Page Scales the image to fit on the output page Factor Specifies the number of drawing units per specified number of inches Scale Scales the image according to a percentage You can select a predefined scaling factor or manually enter a custom scaling factor Decimal places are accepted Alignment Offset Specify where the drawing will appear on the printout You can define custom alignment in inches by entering a X and Y value NOTE This feature is disabled for spreadsheet formats Document Pages Specify the document pages to print All Current or Range 265 PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Page Area Option Description Select the page area to print Extents Print the extent of the document Displayed Print the area displayed in the View window Option is always enabled Limits Prints the file limits instead of extents Option is disabled when Current is selected for Document Pages NOTE This option is only available for AutoCAD draw ings that have the limits defined Selected This option is grayed out by default To enable click Select and then select a print range The Selected option is now enabled Native settings from file This option only applies to Excel files When selected AutoVue uses Excel s print settings that are saved in the excel document
198. ing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances 58 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATION PANEL You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity information Components Ya Components RefDes Part Type Location U4 BOFPCE 29 0001 C1 CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 C4PC321 7 00001 u1 SOP63P 50 0001 U2 SOP63P 50 0001 U3 SSOP5O 50 0001 R4 RESC16 7 00001 R3 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESC16 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 RN1 RESCAX 9 00001 RN2 RESCAX 9 00001 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 RN4 RESCAX 9 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 51 Sw _ SNA 11 0001 52 SW _ SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 DISPLAY1 SEGSMD 29 0001 lt gt Component Pins Name Location With A U5 1 47 1500 false U5 2 47 1500 false U5 3 47 1500 false U5 4 47 1500 false U5 5 47 1500 false U5 6 47 1500 false Customizing Columns In the Navigation Panel you can sort a column change column order or hide show a column To sort a column click the column heading TASK 1 To change the column order or to show hide a column click Customize STEP RESULT The Customize Columns dialog appears 2 Select the check box beside the column or columns you want to display Deselect the check box beside
199. ing values from the backend can be done once during Stamp creation the attribute is configured with the ReadOnce permission by the system adminis trator or the backend values can be read when requested the attribute is configured with the Read permission by the system administrator The following describes each attribute If an attribute is configured with the Edit permission then you can modify the value of the attribute on the Stamp If an attribute is configured with the Write permission then you can save the value on the Stamp to backend system NOTE Provided that you have permissions to update the attribute on the backend system e Ifan attribute is configured with the Hidden permission then you cannot see the attribute on the Stamp However you can view the attribute in the Edit dialog and when editing the Stamp 217 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS e Ifan attribute is configured with the current date or user name default values then these values are displayed on the Stamp only if no value is retrieved from the backend system TASK 1 You can view the attributes of a Stamp by double clicking the Stamp markup entity The DMS Attributes dialog appears and lists all attributes of the Stamp DMS Attributes To edit the value double click on it value Value from DMS Name title Administrator keywords M unknown M unknown r_modifier 2009 05 27 08 01 5 Administrator ADDITIONAL INFO
200. inter select Override Printing Minimum Margins From the Units list select the unit to which you want to set the margins Configure other print options To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing 268 PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Header Footer From the Headers Footers tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the headers and footers that you want to print on every page of the document You can enter the text manually or choose from a list of Insert Codes The list of insert codes are f Full path of document v Document Drive d Document Directory b Document Base name e Document file extension e n Total document pages p Current page number N Total tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year M Date Month D Date Day W Date Day of week H Time Hour U Time Minute S Time Seconds r New line F Native Print Settings Excel NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in headers and footers Select a variable from the Insert Variable list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home 269 PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Adding a Header and Footer In the Headers Foote
201. is complete the total number of errors found during the Design Verifi cation process up to the maximum number specified in the Maximum Violations field appear in the Results list 8 To view the description of a violation result select the violation from the Results list STEP RESULT The description appears in the Description field The description includes information such as the type of violation the location where it occurs x and y coordi nates the component or entity it affects and the actual value measured When you select a violation result AutoVue zooms to the entity or set of entities that were affected and highlights them on the drawing 9 Continue to select violation results to view its description ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to restart a new check 10 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog Exporting the Design Verification Results You can export the design verification results into a text file TASK 1 Verify the design 2 Inthe Verify Design dialog click Export STEP RESULT The Export Results dialog appears Navigate and select the directory where you want to export the results 4 Enter a file name Click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the design verification results in a txt text or a csv Comma Separated Values file listing each violation result and its description 6 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog 89 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING
202. isplay the Properties dialog Quick Menus One of the quickest ways to access options is through Quick Menus or context sensitive shortcut menus These are the menus you see when you right click in the workspace Markup Navigation Tree and Model Tree The available Quick Menu options depend on the location where you right click Opening Files You can open base files and Markup files from the File menu and Markup menu respec tively Opening a Local File TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File eX STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 25 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 2 Browse to locate the file that you want to open 3 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a URL You can open a file by specifying the URL to the file TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File ce STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 Fromthe left panel click Web URL 9 3 Inthe File name field enter the URL of the file to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example http AutoVueServer files abc dwg or ftp ftpserver1 com files abc doc 4 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a File from a Server To opena file from a server the server directory must be configured on the AutoVue ser
203. issing XRef notification icon 106 Model tab 22 100 Model Tree 22 100 105 106 107 hiding 107 XRefs 106 Models tab 22 100 N native print settings 270 Navigation Panel 19 58 63 Bookmarks tab 20 62 102 Components tab 21 60 customizing 59 Models tab and Model 22 100 Models tab and Model Tree 22 100 Nets tab 21 61 Views tab 23 101 net connectivity 67 Nets tab 21 61 297 O open file 25 Markup file 187 Oracle AutoVue 14 P pan and zoom window 36 partial print preview 274 pen settings 273 PMI entities 124 aligning 125 configuring 125 captures 126 reference frames 126 views 125 filtering 124 goto 125 hyperlinks 126 PMI filtering 172 PMI initial visibility 171 print 264 batch print 276 file 275 header footer 269 270 margins 267 set 268 options 264 configure 267 partial preview 267 274 pen settings 273 create 273 delete 274 preview a file 275 watermarks 271 add 272 Q Quick Menus 25 R rename markup layer 193 render modes 111 resolve local resources 164 Resource icon 25 S save markups 188 selecting entities 62 selecting views 42 Show Net Connectivity 67 snap settings 168 snapping modes 2D 49 220 3D 148 239 EDA 93 227 specifying a view point 42 streaming file 28 Substituted Resource icon 25 39 substituted resources 39 T text box visibility 263 toggle between layers 193 toolbars 18 tooltips 177 V version information 16 exporting 16 View tab 23 101
204. ist under Set 2 7 From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 8 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is high lighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The X Y and Z coordinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup 245 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 Adding Text From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Vertex Coordinate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordi nate 27 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears All vertices on the model are high lighted Scroll over the vertex whose coordinates you want to add to the markup STEP RESULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip Click the vertex STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates and unit appear a value box entity on t
205. ith A U5 1 47 1500 false U5 2 47 1500 false U5 3 47 1500 false U5 4 47 1500 false U5 5 47 1500 false U5 6 47 1500 false Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks J 20 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower book mark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than
206. ity color polarity and ordering To display the Layers dialog from the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers Sy NOTE For drawings that do not contain layers the Layers menu option and button are disabled The Layers dialog has a Physical Layers section and a Logical Layers section You can display and hide these sections by clicking Expand and Collapse respectively Physical and Logical Layers Sections The Logical Layers section displays the layers in the order they display in the workspace The Physical Layers section displays the layers in the order they appear in the layer stackup when manufactured The Physical Layers section displays a matrix with a mapping of physical layer names to entity types Each row in the matrix corresponds to a physical layer in the board Each column in the matrix lets you control the visibility of an entity type such as pin via or trace The entity types that display depend on the entities available in the open file Select a physical layer to change its visibility layer order and color Select or deselect the entity type of a physical layer to affect its visibility separately from the other entities of the layer When you select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section the associated logical layers are also selected in the Logical Layers section You can also select individual logical layers from the
207. izable and has a set size 216 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 In the workspace click and drag a box to the desired Stamp size STEP RESULT The Stamp dialog closes and the Stamp appears in workspace and in the Markup Entity Tree RESULT Depending on how the Stamp is configured it may appear as a fized size in the workspace or it may be resizable If it is resizable you can select the stamp outline and drag to the desired size If the isotropic option is selected on the stamp it resizes proportionally in all directions To resize the stamp non proportionally your system administrator must updated the Stamp definition NOTE Depending the format of the background image when resizing the Stamp attributes and or text may not align properly with the background image To avoid this issue Enhanced Metafiles EMF should be used as the background image Refer to the Oracle AutoVue Client Server Deployment Installation and Configuration Guide for more information If the Stamp is configured to retrieve backend system attributes then the values of these attributes are displayed on the Stamp in the workspace To modify the text font on the Stamp select the required font and style from the Markup toolbar Viewing Modifying Stamp Attributes The section describes how to view and modify Stamp attributes If your Stamp is configured to read backend attritbutes then the Stamp entity displays these backend attributes Read
208. ject and then select UnGroup RESULT The group of entities appear on the markup as individual entities 252 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Deleting Markup Entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity that you want to delete To select multiple markup enti ties press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 2 From the Markup Properties toolbar click Delete Markups RESULT The selected entity or entities are deleted from the current active file NOTE You can also press the Delete key to delete the markup entities Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree and select Delete Formatting Markup Entity Properties With AutoVue you can modify the formatting of a markup entity via the Format option from the Markup menu or via the Markup Entity Properties dialog See Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog When creating a markup entity you have the option to change the line color line style line thickness arrow style fill color and fill type Additionally you can assign the markup entity the same color as the layer Changing Line Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color A Alternatively right click the entity in the wo
209. kups 77 viewing 75 layers 70 119 178 changing color 73 changing order 71 logical layer visibility 72 logical layers 70 sorting 74 physical layer visibility 72 physical layers 70 leader alignment 263 line color 257 259 line style 259 line thickness 260 M makrups hyperlink 237 249 Markup Entity Properties dialog 258 Markup entity toolbar 18 Markup file 15 Markup files 185 Markup Filter 184 Markup Indicator 25 182 markup layers 262 Markup Navigation Tree 24 183 Markup Panel 24 183 markups 182 185 2D 206 markup entities 206 2D non vector measure 210 angle 214 243 arc 215 area 213 calibrate arc 56 99 154 215 226 233 244 calibrate distance 51 95 151 213 222 230 242 cumulative distance 212 distance 211 2D vector measure 219 angle 224 arc 225 243 area 96 223 calibrate arc 56 99 154 215 226 233 244 calibrate distance 51 95 151 213 222 230 242 cumulative distance 221 229 3D 237 text 246 3D markup entitites 237 3D measure angle 224 arc 225 243 create 238 minimum distance 245 vertex coordinates 246 attachment 197 237 249 edit 198 open 197 change arrow style 255 change fill color 256 change fill type 255 change font 257 change line color 253 change line style 254 change line thickness 254 color 257 consolidate Markup files 195 delete 253 EDA measure angle 231 arc 232 area 230 cumulative distance 221 229 distance 228 EDA markup measure entities 226 minimum distance 23
210. l snap ping modes click All Off 4 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc From the Arc Info list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle Select Add Radius if you want measure the radius Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 10 If you selected an Arc Entity click an edge of the arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 232 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 11 12 13 14 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the meas
211. l the streaming method with the Dynamic Loader option When the option is selected AutoVue loads enough detail to display an accurate visual representation of the model The data is loaded based on the level of detail that is necessary at that point in time When the option is deselected AutoVue requests data in 10 chunks until it reaches full resolution for the file You would see the model initially at coarse resolution but continu ously refining Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Control the initial resolution with the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution slider When you select Dynamic Loader you can control the initial resolution by setting the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution When you set the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution to High the file displays at a higher resolution when you zoom resulting in a smoother look For more information refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide Initial Visibility With the Initial Visibility options you can specify the visibility of model parts when first opening a 3D file Option Description Default Visibility Load model with default visibility options All Visible Force all parts ON in the display All Invisible Force all parts OFF in the display To display model parts select the part s from the Model Tree PMI Initial Visibility With the PMI Initial Visibility option you have the option to set a threshold for the number of PMIs to display for large models To do select
212. lf of the U S Govern ment the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are com mercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Gov ernment contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this soft ware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other mea sures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from thi
213. lick Search Performing an Attribute based Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities by their attributes such as color density shading and so on TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search AQ STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the 3D Search tab Select the search criteria that you want to use for your search 144 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 4 Click Add STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears Attribute Filter Name COLOUR Any value Colour Yalue Test Equals Value 5 From the Name list select the attribute that you want to search STEP RESULT The Value list appears corresponding to the selected attribute 6 Select the Any Value check box if you want to search by any value the associated value options are disabled 7 Deselect the Any Value check box if you want to search by a specific value from the Condition set condition for the search and from the Values list select the values that you want to search 8 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one Attribute Filter repeat steps 4 to 8 9 To edit an Attribute Filter select the filter and click Edit STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears allowing you to edit the filter 10 Todisable an Attribute Filter deselect the check box beside
214. line thick ness 254 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Thickness Select the new line thickness from the options provided The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Thick ness mes Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Thickness 3 To define a custom line thickness from the Markup menu select Format select Line Thickness and then select Customize STEP RESULT The Custom Thickness dialog appears 4 Inthe Line Thickness field enter an integer value in pixels Click OK to close the Custom Thickness dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness Changing Arrow Style AutoVue gives you the option to add an arrow head to certain markup entities For example you can change the arrow style of the line polyline arc freestyle and polygon markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup line entity or entities for which you want to change the arrow style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Arrow Style Select the new arrow style from the options provided RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you
215. m Window view option allows a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a full view of the file The Pan and Zoom Window displays a miniature version of the file and has a movable box frame on top of the miniature to indicate the area of the file displayed in the AutoVue workspace NOTE The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spread sheets TASK 1 From the View menu select Pan and Zoom Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Pan and Zoom Window a STEP RESULT The Pan and Zoom window appears displaying a full view of the file 2 From the Options menu select Dynamic to view the changes in real time 3 To view a close up of a specific area of the file in the AutoVue workspace minimize the frame box by clicking and dragging the frame handles 4 To view a different area of the file in the AutoVue workspace click and drag the frame box to the area that you want to view ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you perform a zoom function in the AutoVue workspace the area displayed in the workspace is highlighted by the frame box in the Pan and Zoom Window 5 From the Pan and Zoom menu select Exit to close the window RESULT The last view performed remains in the AutoVue workspace 36 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Working with 2D Vector Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic
216. measurement The third click defines the endpoint of the angle measurement The points are joined by angle arms with an arc connecting them 4 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the radial and arc length Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path angle measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle also appears in the Measurement Entities dialog 6 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the value box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 8 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 214 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center and diam eter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Are amp STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Arc Info Length list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc 3 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle The options are degrees or radians 4 Select Add Radius if you want to measure the radius of the arc Select Add Diameter if you want to measure t
217. menu select Configure The Configuration dialog appears To implement your changes and to close the Configuration dialog click OK 162 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS General Options To access the General configuration options TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears Configuration x Category General Ref Path CAD Font Paths V Text V Line Style Messuremert Base Font IV Dimensions V Filing 3X 20 7 Line Weights I Load External References Colors i 5X0 Force to black F Line Caps Joins Model PMI Raster Colors Background C Full Resokition Miscellaneous Lacen eo Fit To Window Analysi Colors R 9 Display Options Enable Look Ahead Gaphis Desktop Office Resources V Resolve Local Resources OK Cancel 2 From the Configuration tree select General RESULT The CAD Raster and System Options appear Configuring Options for CAD Files Configure how you want to display text dimensions line styles and so on for CAD files Option Description Text Select to display text entities Clear to hide text entities 163 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS Option Description Dimensions Select to display all dimensional entities Clear to hide all dimension entities Line Weights Select to display varying line thicknesses Clear to make all lines appe
218. minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL NEQRMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click M Set 1 3 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snap ping modes are displayed ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information 4 Ifyou selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geom etry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONALINFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model Click BY Set 2 6 Repeat step 3 and 4 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the l
219. model to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The angle is highlighted and the value of the angle measurement appears in the dialog 8 To take another measurement click Reset Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model You can also calculate the center point location TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure b STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 4 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points STEP RESULT Snapping modes are enabled 153 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to
220. nately to view all files in the backend DMS system leave the search criteria fields empty and click Search STEP RESULT The file results appear in the dialog For each AutoVue session all search results are saved and can be referenced from the File Open dialog as Search Results 1 Search Results 2 and so on 5 Select a file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Streaming Files AutoVue generates streaming files for most supported file formats When a file is accessed by AutoVue for the first time a streaming file is generated The streaming file contains file data and provides the benefit that AutoVue can access the streaming file much faster than it can the native file As a result rendering time is significantly faster when loading from the streaming file 28 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES If the native file changes or its external resource files change or if an INI option changes the streaming file is invalidated In this case AutoVue opens the display from the native file and generates a new streaming file Archive Files The full archive file directory displays in the AutoVue window It is not necessary to decom press the file Double click a file to display it within AutoVue If you would like to markup an archived file the file must be made accessible to AutoVue in a decompressed form File Properties From the File menu select Properties to open the Properties dialog The
221. nder Headers and Footers click inside the Left Center and Right boxes corre sponding to the header or footer position in the original file 270 PRINTING WATERMARKS 3 Select F Native Print Settings Excel from the Insert Code list 4 Click OK to print RESULT The Excel file s headers and footers are printed Watermarks From the Watermark tab of the Print Properties dialog you can specify a watermark that will appear on a printed file When printing a watermark it appears transparent on the file contents You can choose a diagonal horizontal or vertical orientation for the watermark In addition to entering text you can e set the type size and style of font insert Watermark information print system variables To insert Watermark information AutoVue provides a list of codes that you can choose from These codes are f Full path of document v Document Drive e d Document Directory b Document Base name e Document file extension n Total document pages p Current page number e N Total tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year M Date Month D Date Day e W Date Day of week 271 PRINTING WATERMARKS H Time Hour U Time Minute S Time seconds r New line NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in watermarks Select a variable from the Insert Vari
222. noff dialog appears displaying details of the signoff 3 Click OK RESULT The signoff entity appears on the drawing and in the tree and displays the author creation date and approval date 201 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Rescinding the Signoff You can rescind a signoff on a drawing TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation tree or in the workspace double click the signoff markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Rescind RESULT The signoff disappears from the drawing but remains in the Markup Navigation Tree Re Approving a Signoff To re approve the signoff that has been rescinded TASK 1 Inthe tree double click the signoff markup entity The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Approve RESULT The signoff entity re appears on the drawing and the tree Viewing the History of a Signoff TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A 2 Click History STEP RESULT The Signoff History dialog appears displaying the author date and time the signoff was created 3 Click Cancel to close the Signoff dialog 202 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Adding a Symbol A Symbol is a graphical entity such as a company logo Before a graphic enti
223. not select an entity a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again The Get Entity Info dialog appears displaying the information for the selected entity The Extended Data XData button appears if additional information exists for that entity Click XData to view the information Click OK to close the Get Entity Info dialog Viewing Tags Attributes The List Tag Attributes option allows you to view information on block attributes and tags TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select List Tags Attributes Click in the area of the file for which you want to view information on block attri butes and tags ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected box a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again STEP RESULT The Block Attributes dialog appears displaying the attributes tags for the selected entity Click OK to close the Block Attributes dialog Viewing Information for a Set of Entities The Entity Information option allows you to view information of a set of entities contained in a specific area of a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Entity Information 46 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH PDF FILES 2 Click and drag to highlight the entities for which you want to view entity informa
224. nter point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements Area Measurement Snapping Location Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines 220 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off 4 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the pat
225. ntity Note Entity Information Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note See Adding a Note Polygon Polyline Click and drag to draw a polygon From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polygon A Click and drag to draw a polyline From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polyline A To force a line segment in a Polyline entity to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes Stamp Adds a Stamp to a document that includes specific document and user information metadata pulled directly from the DMS ERP PLM UCM system From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp 2 See Creating a Stamp Text Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text AL See Adding Text Adding a Freestyle Entity You can create a freestyle markup entity You have the option of making the entity non contiguous or contiguous Creating a Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle Ze 2 Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the
226. ntity types that you do not want to select ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all entity types select the column header check box Deselect the column header check box to deselect all entity types 4 Click Apply to apply the changes Close OK to close the Entity Filter dialog RESULT Only the selected entity types remain displayed in the workspace When you click in the workspace only the entity types checked in the Entity Filter dialog will be highlighted Entity Properties The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design To view the Entity Properties dialog first select an entity from the workspace and then from the Analysis menu select Show Entity Prop erties NOTE You can also double click an entity in the workspace or right click an entity in the workspace Navigation Panel or Entity Search dialog and then select Show Entity Proper ties 65 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Entity Properties Associations Entity Info K Component Instance gt RefDes U5 Part Type SS0OP50P620200 40M Location 50 000000 20 000000 0 000000 Rotation 0 000000 Component Definition 550P50P620x200 40M Glued false Layer Top penes of Connections 0 On the left side of the Entity Properties dialog a tree displays all the entities associated with the entity you selected The entity you s
227. o right click the workspace and select Zoom Page Width Vertical Fit the image vertically in the active window The horizontal dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window Both AutoVue finds the best fit for the current file with respect to both its vertical and horizontal dimensions From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Ibl NOTE You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Fit Pan and Zoom Window Pan Display a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a view of the entire file From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click lt a NOTE The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spreadsheets See Using the Pan and Zoom Window for more information Click and drag to move the drawing To exit right click From the Auto Vue toolbar you w can also click Wi NOTE The Rotate option is disabled for archived files text based documents and spreadsheets 35 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Rotate Rotate Clockwise Rotate the file 90 degrees Menu Sub Menu Description clockwise From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click 6g Rotate Counter Clockwise Rotate the file 90 degrees counter clockwise From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click gf Using the Pan and Zoom Window The Pan and Zoo
228. o undo the hide option from the Markup menu deselect Hide Markups Hiding Markup Files To hide selected a Markup file do the following TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree right click the Markup file then select Hide 2 To undo the hide option right click the file name again and select Show 251 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities When you group markup entities you can move delete copy and paste transform or perform any modification on the group of entities that you would on a single markup entity NOTE You can only group markup entities created on the same page Grouping Markup Entities TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the markup entities that you want to group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When selecting markup entities in Markup mode press Ctrl and drag the box to select all the markup entities within the area 2 From the Markup menu select Object and then select Group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the selected markup entities and then select Group STEP RESULT The group of entities appear in the tree under Group 3 Perform any modifications RESULT The modifications are applied to all the entities in the group Ungrouping Markup Entities TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select the group that you want to ungroup 2 From the Markup menu select Ob
229. objects that cross the zone or lie within the zone being avoided Copper zone An area on a board designed to be covered by a layer of copper when manufactured Also known as a metal zone Cross hatching The breaking up of large conductive areas by the use of a pattern of lines and spaces in the conductive material Datum A specific location a point that serves as a reference to locate a PCB pattern or layer for manufacture Density On a PCB the degree to which components are packed on the board Generally the density is given as the number of square inches per equivalent i e a lower number indicates a more dense board Discrete components Components with three or fewer electrical connections for example resistors or capacitors Electrical check The process of checking the PCB to ensure that the connections they are on match those specified in the net list Fill zone A zone that defines an area to be filled with copper Fine pitch A class of surface mount components that is characterized by pins measuring 0 025 inches or less from pad center to pad center 285 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS Footprint EDA Term Definition The physical description of a component It consists of three elements padstacks representing the pads of the component obstacles representing among other things the physical outline of the component silks
230. odel size representation of the Global Axes going through the selected part or parts of the 3D model Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manipulate STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part or parts that you want to pan ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box Click and hold the mouse button on the arrow at the end of the axis that you want to pan Drag the mouse to where you want to move the part or parts To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate amp or from the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manipulate STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode 127 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate AD
231. om the Options menu select Configure In the Configuration dialog that appears select EDA in the tree Customizing Selections Configure how you want selected components to be highlighted From the Configuration tree select EDA There are two selection options Highlight Entity and Dim Unselected Highlight Entity Activate this option to highlight all entities that you select This option is enabled by default NOTE The default highlight color is yellow See Also Modifying Colors Dim Unselected Activate this option to dim all the entities that are not selected Selected entities retain their original entity color From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Dim Unselected When you select Dim Unselected you can set the dimness level for entities that are not selected Drag the slider to the right to increase the dimness level and to the left to decrease the dimness level The icon to the right of the dimness settings in the Configuration dialog lets you preview the dimness level Additionally with Dim Unselected you can select the Thicken Highlighted Entity check box This option makes the selected entity appear more pronounced Deselect the check box to return the entity to its default thickness Displaying Tooltips When you hover the mouse over an entity a tooltip appears to show you information about the entity You can disable or enable these tooltips When the option is selected AutoVue 176 CONFIGURIN
232. or and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc gq Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance p Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points See Changing Measurement Units and Symbols Changing Font TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 4 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STE
233. ossseosseesssseessseerssseresse 233 Io Lo ATS KILES EOE E E T EN E IE E 235 Hiding the box surrounding the t Xt ssssss sessesessssssseeseesssssssssesseeessessnsssssseesreososssssseesrersressssssese 235 fo Ko Mare K NOG AASE EEEE EEE EEE 236 Nesting Markup ERtthess 5 sccicsssesasctvasciessessatuennsartcoaasaieostantoern E i E E i s 237 3D Spe ifi Markus sennoina a a R A n AENA 237 SVE KUP ENTITE Sedis eton nesa eeen eE aeaa Ea eoe aeea Te osar o aE ae S 237 Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities ccccssssescseessssesscsnssssssessusssecsussecesssssessscsessncescensessesees 238 No el ele REIA a AR E E A A A A E E A E Uae ne 246 PCI a NOUS e er E EE EAE E E E E O R Rat 248 Nesting Markup Entities esssssssesesesssssssseocseesssssssssossceeseesnsssssseecseessssssssseeseeeosesnssssessteeseosnsssssseesreeressss 249 Working with Markup Entities sessssssseeeseessssssssseeseessssssssseseeeeseessnssssseecseeososssssseoseeeosesnsssesseersressesssssseeseee 249 Go Toa Markup Enti ty casacsczstscsscssasessichadescdscnszssn ttudessacpasnscachonsda chau casessbenges na a aS 249 Selecting Markup Entiti ES irsinin nitr easi ia sets ESTS 250 Moving a Markup Entity ssaeseessesossoesoeseeeeeeeeeeeereeeeereereeeeeeeeeeereeeseeereereereeeeereerssersrrsersnssnssessessssssssssss 250 Transforming Markup EntitiES s s seseseseesssssssssesseesssssssseosseeessssssssssseeeseessnssssseeeeseessessssseeseeesresssssesse 250 Rotating a selected
234. owse to locate the file that you want to link to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Make sure to include the http protocol in the URL If the protocol is not included or if no value is entered in the URL field then an error message is thrown when the Hyperlink markup entity is opened 6 From the Open In list select where you want the hyperlink to open Open in Description A new applet window Opens the file in another Auto Vue window Current applet window Opens the file in the current AutoVue window A new browser window Opens the file in the default browser window A current browser window Opens the file in the current browser window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are creating a hyperlink to a Web page URL then you must select A new browser window 199 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 7 Click OK 8 Right click to exit hyperlink creation mode RESULT The hyperlink appears on the Markup Opening a Hyperlink To open a hyperlink double click on it from the workspace The hyperlink file opens in the window you selected in the Establish Hyperlink dialog Editing a Hyperlink TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyperlink that you want to edit 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Edit Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Edit Hyperlink STEP RESULT The
235. p jpeg or img files 3 From the Stretch Type list select whether to leave the image as is Stretch to fill Zoom to fit or Zoom to fill 4 From the Position in the Background list select where to position the image and then click OK 5 To add multiple background images repeat steps 1 through 4 6 You can change the order of the background images To do so select a file from the Background Images list and then click Up to move an image to the front and Down to send an image to the back 7 To edit the background image select the file from the Background Images list and then click Edit STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears Edit as required 8 To remove a background image from the Background Images list select the file and then click Remove 9 Click OK when done RESULT NOTE The selected background image is implemented Miscellaneous From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Miscellaneous to display the Miscellaneous option Display The Show Global Axes option is active by default Disable this option to remove the axes that display in the bottom right corner of the workspace You can change the size of the global axes by moving the Size of Axes slider Move the slider to the left to minimize the axes and to right to maximize 174 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Model Tree Enter a value in the Expand Level field to define the level at
236. pace or in the Navigation panel and then from the View menu select Ascend Hierarchy AutoVue returns to the parent page NOTE You can also right click an entity in the workspace or in the Navigation panel and select Ascend Hierarchy amp If you select an entity that has multiple parents the Ascend Hierarchy dialog appears displaying the parent pages Select the Parent page you want to go to then click OK AutoVue returns to the selected parent page Ascend Hierarchy Please select a page 15 Channel CD Data Flow 17 Channel 4B Data Flow 18 Channel EF Data Flow 20 Channel GH Data Flow Cancel NOTE You can also select the entity in the Entity Search dialog then right click and select Ascend Hierarchy Navigating using Descend Hierarchy On the parent page of your schematic s design hierarchy select any hierarchical block in the workspace or in the Navigation Panel then from the View menu select Descend Hier archy AutoVue opens the page with the selected child schematic 69 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS NOTE You can also right click the hierarchical block in the workspace and then select Descend Hierarchy amp Layers When working with EDA files AutoVue lets you view all the physical layers and associated logical layers of the EDA drawing you can view all layer sets for that file or create your own Additionally from the Layers option you can manipulate certain layer attributes such as visibil
237. ponents Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts Ifa plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower book mark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Selecting Entities Selecting an entity or entities is often the first step to many of the operations that you perform with EDA files The following sections provide information on how to select enti ties from the workspace Navigation Panel and the Entity Search dialog To specify which types of entities you can or cannot select use the Entity Filter dialog See Filtering Entity Types for more information on the Entity Filter dialog Once an entity is selected you can zoom to it in the workspace and perform other opera tions with the EDA file 62 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SELECTING ENTITIES From the Navigation Panel To select an entity from the Navigation Panel perform the following steps To select one entity click the component net associated pin or net node in the Navigation Pane To select multiple entities press the Shift or Cont
238. proportionately Click Anisotropic if you want to scale the Symbol disproportionately 204 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 6 Drag the Symbol onto the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more Symbols repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The Symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree 7 Close the Symbols dialog Creating a New Symbol Library NOTE Once a Symbol library is created the existing library should not be modified If it is modified it will not be possible to add or remove existing symbols TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol The Symbols dialog appears ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol 2 Click the Libraries tab 3 Click Create STEP RESULT The Symbol Library dialog appears Symbol Library Selected Files Name Description Author Keywords 4 Enter the library name description author and keywords in their respective fields 5 To add a symbol to the library click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 205 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Browse to locate the symbol you want to add and then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more symbol repeat steps 4 to 6 To remove a symbol select the symbol and click Remove STEP RESULT The file appears in the Symbol Files list Close the Symbol dialog Dele
239. r which you want to change the line thickness To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Line Thickness list select the required line thickness STEP RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities Defining a Custom Line Thickness To define a custom line thickness take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Thickness list select Customize 2 Inthe Width Pixels field enter the desired width 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness Width Pixels Customize the line thickness when Customize is selected in the Line Thickness list When other line thicknesses are selected this field displays its value in pixels but cannot be edited 260 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Arrow Style Add an arrow head at one or both ends of a markup line entity TASK 1 Select the markup line entity you want to change the arrow style To select multiple markup line entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Arrow Style list select the style of arrow that you want for the markup line entity 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line en
240. rate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 151 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Minimum Distance With the Minimum Distance option you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 10 11 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure lal STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Min Distance tab Click M Set 1 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snap ping modes are enabled If you selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geom etry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on
241. rate the distance to a value Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snap ping modes click All Off 4 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing 5 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 6 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 230 Markups CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 7 To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add in the Measurement Entities dialog To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field 10 If you selected Between Points
242. rawing information 45 set of entities 46 single entity 46 tag attributes 46 dynamic load mesh resolution 171 E EDA 58 3D views 78 ascend hierarchy 69 BOM 83 comparing PCB 82 cross probing 78 design hierarchy 69 design verification 84 entitiy properties 67 entity properties 65 entity search 90 91 92 filtering entity types 65 layer sets 75 layers 70 manipulating views 77 measuring 92 angle 97 arc 98 calibrating arc 56 99 154 215 226 233 244 calibrating distance 51 95 151 213 222 230 242 distance 94 minimum distance 95 snapping modes 93 227 net connectivity 67 net instances 68 net properties 68 selecting entities 62 63 entity seach dialog 64 terms and definitions 284 zooming to an entity 64 enable look ahead 164 entity properties 120 294 attributes 120 extents 123 mass properites 122 mass properties 121 entity properties dialog box 65 entity reference 104 entity search dialog 64 export Markup file 189 F file convert 281 file properties 29 open 25 print 275 file properties 29 123 file version information 16 files archive 29 open from server 26 27 28 open local 25 open url 26 properties 29 streaming file 28 fill color 257 262 fill type 261 filtering entity types 65 font 257 font paths 166 frame rate 170 From 46 G GUI 17 H header footer 269 import Markup file 188 insert codes 269 295 L layer sets 75 user defined layers sets create 75 delete 76 save with mar
243. rd parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services September 2013 Contents PYG ACS as sczsslcuncn canna feces jevcsesen hisser istisini ee asa a ai aaan E 12 ETO 10E EEEE AE E AE 12 PAEL U Dlou aa ETALE AEEA E A N E E E AA A 12 EALA A EOE E E AE E E EE ASEE OEE E EAEE 13 Fey Agere alto e a N T NANS 14 Oracle AUtoVU ennonn nanni Re e a n a Ra S E ae E AEA 14 Marking Up DO CUS NICS anren aen de E E tea a s ashe Aia ate ESS 15 PRUIE ON UIC BASICS AEEA E E EEEE 16 AutoVue Version Information sssssesssesseseeeeeeeeerserserserseeseeseeeeeeeeerseeserseeseeseessesstssessnssssssessssnensens eneses ees 16 Viewing Version and Build Information cccsssssessscsssssecsesssessssncessssssssesssesessseacsssceacesseseesnsesees 16 AutoVue Graphical User Interface sesessssssssssssessessncssssssssessssssessncssssssssscsssssscsusssssscescessssecsusescancesseses 17 Men Balendinen ved man aAA ERAN R sn EA RENAE ER E E RE RE 18 KOO I AVS EA EEEE EA EER AEA 18 Navigation Panelas n eea ae aa iE E TES E une daa S 19 Markup Navigation Trf e ssssssssssseesssssssssssseecseessssssssseoseesssssssssessteesressssssessteeeressesssssses
244. re is only supported for the Text and Stamp markup entities TASK 1 From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is not possible to select multiple markup entities to rotate From the Markup menu select Object and then select Rotate Rotate the markup entity by clicking and dragging its control points Pressing the Shift key while dragging will snap the rotation to 45 degree intervals 250 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Changing Object Order You can change the order of markup entities in a markup layer To move an entity forward or backward do the following TASK 1 Select an entity from the workspace or Markup Entity tree 2 From the Markup menu select Object then select Order and then select one of the following options Option Description To Back Moves the markup entity behind all the other entities in the markup layer To Front Moves the markup entity in front of all other entities in the markup layer Backward Moves the markup entity backward by one level Forward Moves the markup entity forward by one level Hiding All Markup Entities To hide all markup entities do the following TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Hide Markups ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A check mark appears next to the Hide Markups option and the markup entities are hidden on the Markup file 2 T
245. re overlaid as a layer on top of the drawing AutoVue provides a variety of flexible user friendly entities To name a few there are circles clouds polygons and leaders You can also attach text to entities insert a note for longer comments add attach ments or add a stamp such as a company logo In addition you can create measurement markup entities and hyperlinks that link between the current file and other associated files or applications AutoVue Basics This section introduces the basics of working in AutoVue such as starting and exiting AutoVue the help menu changing the locale of AutoVue displaying file versions informa tion and the AutoVue graphical user interface GUI The section on the AutoVue GUI discusses the included menu bars tool bars navigation panel and navigation tree AutoVue Version Information The About dialog displays AutoVue version and build information You can also view the version build number and build date of components that are shipped with AutoVue You can also export this information into a text file Viewing Version and Build Information To view product version information TASK 1 From the Help menu select About STEP RESULT The About dialog appears and displays the AutoVue version number and build date 2 To view version and build information for components click Version Info 3 To export the version information click Export STEP RESULT The Export dialog appears
246. rinting With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time You can also generate a batch by simultaneously opening all the files included in the batch print TASK 1 From the File menu select Batch Print STEP RESULT The Batch Print dialog appears To add a file to be printed click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file or files that you want to add then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more files to the list repeat steps 2 to 4 To remove a file s select the file from the List of files to be printed and click Remove STEP RESULT The files appear in the List of files to be printed Click OK in the Batch Print dialog STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing 276 PRINTING BATCH PRINTING 277 Conversion Sometimes you need to convert a file to be able to use it with an application it was not created from AutoVue provides several conversion file formats for you Conversion Options From the File menu select Convert to open the Convert dialog Depending on the conver sion type being performed the available options in the Convert dialog may vary These options are Option Color Depth Description Select an option from the list 1 Black and white 4
247. rkspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Color STEP RESULT The Line Color dialog appears 3 From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer Z changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer 253 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 4 To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color YA 5 From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK 6 Click OK to close the Line Color dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line color Changing Line Style The current line style is highlighted in the Line Style option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Style Select the new line style from the options provided RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line style Changing Line Thickness The current line thickness is highlighted in the Line Thickness option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
248. rns etched in the board that allow gases formed during fabrication to escape Vertex A logical point at which a track is ended and restarted A vertex is located at each change of direction on the track Via feed through hole A hole connecting layers of a PCB A through hole via connects the surface layers of a board On multilayer boards a via not reaching a surface layer on one side is called a blind via and a via not reaching a surface layer on either side thus being externally invisible is called a buried via Viastack A numbered list of via descriptions Each description contains a via definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width Via string The copper etch that exists between a SMT pad and a corresponding fanout via Zero length connection An unrouted connection between layers where the end points in the connection have the same X and Y coordinates Zone An area on a PCB layer designated as copper or anti copper Copper zones may have net names while anti copper zones may not 289 Feedback If you have any questions or require support for AutoVue please contact your system administrator Some customization and maintenance must be done on the server and cannot be implemented on the client machine If the administrator is unable to resolve the issue please contact Oracle Corp General Inquiries Web Site h
249. rol key while selecting The selected entity or entities are highlighted in the workspace If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace See Zooming to a Selected Entity From the Workspace To select an entity from the workspace perform the following steps Click an entity in the workspace to select it To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the high lighted entity in the workspace You can also apply selection filters when selecting entities in the workspace See Filtering Entity Types When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with information about the entity s attributes appears The tooltip displays whether or not you select the entity 63 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ZOOMING TO A SELECTED ENTITY From the Entity Search Dialog To select and entity from the Entity Search dialog perform the following steps TASK 1 Perform an attribute based or entity type based search using the Entity Search dialog 2 Select an entity or entities from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list of the Entity Search dialog To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting
250. rom the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system NOTE The Stamp is only available if a system administrator has defined and configured the Stamp A Stamp can retrieve a document s attributes directly from the backend system They can also update attributes from the Stamp to the document in the backend system Backend system attributes that the Stamp can read and write to can be simple values or a list of values When lists are constrained you can only select from the pre defined list When lists are non constrained you can enter a value that is not in the drop down list When an attribute is a multi valued attribute AutoVue lets you select multiple values from the drop down list In this case values are separated by a semi colon NOTE As of Auto Vue 20 2 Stamps are disabled for 3D files Existing stamps that were defined in previous releases of AutoVue can still be viewed but cannot be modified Adding a Stamp To add a Stamp markup entity to a document do the following TASK 1 Enter Markup mode 2 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Stamp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp 2 STEP RESULT The Stamp dialog appears 3 From the Choose Stamp box select the desired Stamp and then click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Enable Resizing check box is selected then the Stamp can be resized in the workspace If the check box is grayed out then the Stamp is not res
251. roperties of the selected mass STEP RESULT When a mass property cannot be calculated N A displays in red for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 5 To change the density change measurement units or configure computation of inertia tensor click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 6 Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog 121 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Configuring Mass Properties From the Mass Properties tab you can change the density the measurement units or configure the reference point of inertia tensor TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Mass Properties tab 3 Click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 4 To change the density enter a value in the Density field To change the density units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respec tive lists in the Units section 6 To apply the density to model parts with unknown density select Use Only for Parts with Unknown Density To apply the density to all model p
252. roperties or fill color of the Leader select the Leader then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors 10 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification ADDITIONALINFORMATION To edit the Leader text double click the Leader in the tree orin the workspace STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D non vector files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work a bit differently than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 210 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measure options vary between vect
253. rouped according to their interrelationships and placed in close proximity on the board This keeps the connections on the PCB short so that the board is easier to work with Component An element or a part of a PCB Component density The quantity of components on a unit area of a PCB Component hole A hole in the printed circuit board that corresponds to a pin or wire of a component This hole serves the dual function of attaching the component to the board and establishing the electrical connection between the pin or wire and the remainder of the board circuitry Component library A computer data file that contains the footprint patterns for a number of components 284 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Component side Definition The uppermost or top layer of a board on which most components are placed Component silkscreen The silkscreen markings of the printed circuit board that appear on the component side The silkscreen is applied over the solder mask Component solder mask The colored usually translucent coating applied to the board over the etched copper It protects the selected areas from the soldering process Connection An unrouted partially routed or completely routed path between two pads In a net with n pads there are exactly n 1 connections Copper pour A method by which a copper zone is filled with a specified pattern with
254. rressessssssesseresesss 24 SUALUS Ball E SE TE E EEE 24 RUIN SITUS i css nnna a a a a a a A a Sle elas 25 Op ning File Sms nisni hnnan in isses in snis 25 Opening a Local Files i sesnnsniienaeii iani a a EA AE R naidianate 25 Openinga UR Upmann nahia aa a NRO METRES SO NE SaaS Ors C nt SOOO EN 26 Opening a File from a Serve f c sssvesvscsscsvsconcoosstotanssevenncons ceaoncnossonsonssvenpecosaboudsondedevcecsiomessussotersvecionegee 26 Opening a File from a Backend DMS System cssssssssscsecseccssecseecsccssceseccsscensesseesscesscessccssceseense 27 SUT ANTUNES CH H EE A E E OAE ENE E EE 28 Archive Files ss ainoina iiite a a aai E AEE E T S aE AES s 29 File PYOpErti Shroud aseri n rE ESSN EEES ESENES ETES EEREN SSS 29 Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages ssssesssssseeesssssssssssseecseesssssssseoseeesssssnsssesseeessesnsssss 30 Work na MA Ee S E R A he ease eos an Ino 32 SS AN SIRNA TICE sec scacacas ces sayecnccas E A E A TE A E 32 2D Viewing OPtiO N Secesticescpeveastincesisbcesnsecdidecenneced Saceachenaksaodduda encdnemeans E E edad laa 33 Using the Pan and Zoom Window s ssssesssssssssseseeessessssssesseessessnsssssseecseessessnssseeseeoressnsssseseeeseessesssss 36 Working with 2D Vector Filesi a e E T a 37 Manipulating 2D Vector Files ssssssssseeessssssssssseeeseessssssssseeeseesssssssseeseeessssnssssesseeeseesssssesseesreessesssssseeree 37 Selecting SWS ccoceoseces te e e ian a A E A a i e 42 Specifying a View
255. rror image in the Mirror section of the dialog select a check box To scale the model by a factor enter a scale factor in the Factor field Click Apply To apply absolute transformation instead of incremental select the Absolute check box Click Apply To repeat a transformation deselect Absolute then continue clicking Apply ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the model to its original transformation click Reset Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed RESULT To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Trans form and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All 131 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Sectioning With the Sectioning feature you can view the cross section and cut through of 3D models In the Define Section dialog you can define the section plane position section plane orien tation and the cut through Section Plane Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following options to define the orientation of the section plane Option Description XY Plane Section plane is oriented along the XY plane YZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the YZ plane XZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the XZ plane From 3 Vertices Select three vertices on the object to define the orientation of the section plane From Fa
256. rs tab you can manually enter text or choose from a list of Insert Codes to appear in the headers and footers You can also print system variables TASK 1 po OM ND 11 12 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Headers Footers tab Click in the Left Center or Right field and enter the text that you want to appear in the header and footer or choose an Insert Code or Insert Variable To Insert Code in the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a code from the list To Insert Variable in the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a variable from the list To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears From the Font list select the type of font From the Size list select the size of font To set the font Style click Bold or Italic or both then click OK In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Native Print Settings You can choose to include predefined headers and footers when printing an Excel file from AutoVue TASK 1 2 From the Print Properties dialog click the Headers Footers tab U
257. s Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls C Restore last view Show walkthrough dialog at startup NOTE Closing the Walkthrough dialog does not exit Walkthrough mode To exit you must deselect Walkthrough from the View menu The Instructions panel explains the possible model manipulation options while you perform the walkthrough See Walking Through a 3D Model for more information From the Speed panel of the Walkthrough dialog you can adjust the increment speed of the camera for all walkthrough functions By default the Move through walls option is selected This feature allows you to walk through walls when viewing a model You can deselect the option to enable the collision detection feature The Restore last view option saves the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup option to display the Walkthrough dialog when you enter Walkthrough mode Deselect the option to disable the Walkthrough dialog on startup NOTE If you want to re enable the Walkthrough dialog on startup from the Options menu select Configure From the Configuration dialog select Miscellaneous and then select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup checkbox Refer to Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files for more information 158 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Walking Through a 3D Model If you want to posi
258. s and hide the rest of the model TASK 1 Select the part or parts on the model or from the Model Tree ADDITIONALINFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree To hide the selected part or parts right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Part STEP RESULT The selected part or parts are hidden on the model To display the selected part or parts and hide the rest of the model right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Rest STEP RESULT The selected parts are displayed in the workspace and the rest of the model is hidden Creating 3D Mockups You can import other 3D Models into the current active file 107 WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups The imported files must be 3D and have similar dimensions TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears Click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to import Click Open STEP RESULT The file appears in the Mockup dialog To import more than one file repeat steps 2 to 4 The Enter Markup Mode check box is selected by default If you deselect it any modifications you make to the mockup are not saved Click OK to the clos
259. scesssssuscssceesccsscesseesscescesses 91 Performing an Attribute based Search n ccsssssssssesssssssssscsssssscsessncsscsssssscssssseecncescessesscesseseesseesees 92 Me asuiririg in EDA PIs sississssccoxcasssash isunen innari isn 92 EDA Snapping ModE Snina canina n EAR ARN 93 M asuring DISTANCE nsession a R E AAE EA 94 Calibrating Distant Eneteia ena nao Eeee na a Ess Eo s a aeaiee 95 Measuring Minimum DistanCe ssseessseessseessssscsssseesssceessseeesseeessseeoseseosseeossseesssceroseerssseressseeessseeossees 95 Meas ring Aled scion leesa a a IN a Leas AG eu CON ee ee 96 Measuring aN AAG esner esn easa Saen EEEa EESE nsan Esenes et EEr iiSi taai 97 Me s ring aN AlCu uritarra onas iatis usiin ssar aie Eiaa A aTe EEEE EEE SE Eaa EE aE ariei S 98 Calibrating aN A C of sscescosccrnceeedtieecrnsthunstiuternnteomt e eee E T a SET T 99 Kota Tare NAIA EEI DA m E E vows E E EE TE EEA E 100 Models Tab and Model Tr e ssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssensessenseneeseesnesteseeseeeersereereereererreereerererrsres 100 Mews Tab ccccs cd cestercsas tech marsdtisacendastudeneansaebanianieueaeaubala N a E a aS 101 Bookmarks Ta Drsiisnenanniianun a tected E E a an eaten a ee 102 Gl bal AXES sarria eiia ea aee eaa caste aO aen enS oae eO SENAST oiTa AREST 102 Sel cting Model Parts wtuirnszsaiucicenakiatatnnndaaneadniti lars EN Rs 103 Select Model Parts from the WorkSpace secsssssssssssssssesssssscssssscssecsessnscse
260. search Some of the available attributes Color Density Display_Mode Filepath Layer_ID Name Translucency Visibility NOTE The attributes vary depending on the file being viewed See Performing an Attribute based Search Any Value When selected AutoVue searches for any value of the selected attribute The attribute value options are disabled If cleared specify the values for the selected attribute you want to search The attribute value options correspond to the selected attribute 142 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where Option Description Advanced 3D Volume Specify the size of an entity the minimum and maximum Search tab dimensions The dimensions of an entity boundary box must be between the specified dimensions to meet the search criteria Location Specify an axes aligned boundary box The boundary box of an entity must be inside it to meet the search criteria Performing a Search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search Q STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the 3D Search tab 3 From the Selection list specify what parts of the model that you want to search To search the entire model select All To search specific parts of a model select Selected and then select the parts on the model To search the model parts
261. seeessesnsssesseeesreosssssesseeeeresrsssssseeerressssss 220 Measuring DISCAIVE GC eave Ki oe hacia AO aeann a aaa ea oe eh ee et 221 Measuring Cumulative Distance ccessscsssssssssssseesecsecsecssccssssscsuccssssussaccassescssssasesuseacesscesceseesseess 221 Calibrating DistanNC ssuissiinnsninnnrssrss iirinn isise o err EE KSEE ESN ENEs TS 222 PSS SUITING PU iinsoerseesriieosa oseese ra eeaeee eRe aa E aa raaes aea aas Ta Ea ariasi 223 Measuring aN ANg E E a A AEETIS 224 Measuring aNAl Cecene dotirieercsaievsesaeerosianes ideansa nenin asenna ienei i ended soana iaoa cae deeso enaa u Ses iaaeaie 225 Cali brating aN ArGe A an a a a E a 226 Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities cccsssssssssssessssssessncssssssssscssssssesnssaccssssscsssesesnsesesnsencensenses 226 EDA Snapping Modes eoi iier arie TEE A AE A E 227 Me suring DISTANCE nann Ra EAEE E a TEES 228 Measuring Cumulative Distance ssssssssessseessssssssseeseeessessnsssssseeseessessssssooereessrssssssesstessrssnsssesseeeses 229 Calibrating Distance rnain E R tae A SANN S NAS 230 Me suring Aed asse tinssreiieiniirsriia riiai iai asi a i aE Eiei aie 230 Measuring aN Angle Sanonnat a AT A E E E Erti 231 Meas ring aN PTC canes asec ee Rit ae Ds heed eae 232 Calibrating eA VAI see cesesccacncazssevas vets stsosnetvsa dunes eean Ensei iacnsstoucsiar doaTe S ET EA OE SETAN 233 Measuring Minimum DistanCe esssesssseessseeessseesssecsssscesssceessceessseeessseeessseeossee
262. select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to rename Click Rename STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears Enter the new layer name Click OK STEP RESULT The markup layer is assigned the new name Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Toggling between Markup Layers From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to show or hide a layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 193 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS 2 To show hide a layer or layers perform one of the following a Select a layer and click Toggle The layer s check box will switch between selected and deselected To view all the markup layers click All On To hide all markup layers click All Off b From the Markup Layers list select the check box next to the layer or layers you want visible and deselect the check box next to the layer or layers you want to hide 3 Click OK RESULT The markup entities belonging to the selected layer or layers appear in the workspace on top of the original file Deleting a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to delete a selected layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup La
263. sessceeseesssssssseeeseessossssssesseeessessnssosseersressnssssseeesees 176 CUSTOMIZING Selections sranmnnsan rnana a A a E KR AR 176 Displaying TOOltipS aninaninnnnane aa a ERa 176 Modifying 3D VIEW drede hs ecclesia a iras aeai e ea taei eito eoon 177 Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssseneeneesseneeseesseseeereeeee 177 Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross ProbiNg sscssssssccssssessssscssssseesssssessecsscssssseessseseeses 178 Modifying Color Ssn neaa ca leccacaeccb dete cates tian deacalaacaleatd a yasauaceddeactelaaglonienss 178 Enhanced Display OptiOiys cisctsscscscsusscsccssousugechsencentdeosssedcacescesssuncats av acdllasasscosavantaadbeucecascasnantesblesstaces 179 Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files essessecssssssessssessecsncsssssecsssssessncenceasceseeseeseeees 180 Configuring Background Colors for Desktop OFFICE uu esssssesssssscssssseesssssessnsssessesseesnsssessnesscessesees 181 ENA coc ev EA E A EE A A reese cavers EA TEREA E IE AO E EA 182 Markup Navigation Tre e ssssssssssesseesssssssssesseeesessssssesseesseessssssssseeseessessnssssesereseessnssssssteseeosesssssseesreeesesssssesse 183 Filtering MarkK p Szeenen a RNE E a E aE EESE 184 Working with Markup Files esssssssssssseessssssssseeseeessessnsssssseecsensnsssssseeeseessssssssesseeessesssssseseeessrossnssesseeerrreressss 185 STENA O Eo h E EARNE A EEO 185 Creating a Markup File orc acacecov
264. snapping at any point on the drawing IZ Net Allows snapping to a net Trace Allows snapping to a trace Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure lal STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumula tive Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 94 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating Distance Cali
265. sscsscssscssccssessseessceeseeseecseeseesscessceeseeses 192 Changing the Color of a Markup Layer sssssesssssssssssessessossossoseossoseeseoseeseeseeeeeeeeeereereeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeee 192 Renaming a Mark p Layers coisa hice E TE T N OR ER 193 Toggling between Markup Layers ssssssscssssscsssccsecssecssscssecssccssesssesuscensesssesscesseesseesecessesseesseess 193 Deleting a Markup Layer ssssssssssssessessessesseseeseeereereereeeeeererserereereereereeresreerreresersessessessessessessssssssssse 194 Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer ou sessssscssccssesssecsecsecsscessecseecsscesseeseecssesseesueesneesseeses 194 Consolidating Markt Files seoeminnensmnnnmnanna naana a n a ERARA 195 Marking up 2D and 3D Fil6eS sseesssssssssssseeessesssssesseesseesssssssssosseerssesnsssesseeessessnsssssteeserssnsssssseesreessesssssesse 196 Adding an Attachment a a a i a a e Aee 197 Opening an Attachment ssssssssssseesssssssseeseeessessssssssstecseeossssssseeseeeesossnsssessteesreosnsssessteeereonsssssseesereesssss 197 Editing an Attachment sinense nne R R i nie 198 Addinga HY Berit ne miraus sansa c ce sessccsctess tstdboceussatdcnnseascadastoldsoas aE aa E n S ri a oni 198 Creating a agb d 1d Ua arenans ce ea er mere rare ron rT nn oT ne ONT Seen one 198 CODEINITG FAV SENN cooceecee eae cleat od ie csan ae Se Aas tao oa 200 Editing a Hyp rlin Kansases nnana naaa chuvesosvesbchacaden as 200 D letinga Hyperlink seserinis a i
266. ssnceaccsscseesnssseesnseseessesees 103 Selecting All Identical Parts Of a Model ssssssssssessessssssssseceeeessssnsssesseeessessnsssessteserosesssssseeeseessesss 103 REEI NYE EE EEEE EEE EEE 104 Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part ss ssesssssssssseseeessessssssssseecsessssssssseoseeessesssssesse 104 Re Center All iiemet anen a elas a AES a A Sa 104 AREE AA E TS E A E apatecatics 104 Re Centering a Model to an Entity sssssssesssssesssssssssssoesessoeseeseeseeseoseecoseoeeeseeeeeeereereereereereeeeeeereerrereres 105 Model Tresserre nsiepn nr a e ten sa a a aeea e teens een TE e E eTa 105 Expanding Collapsing the Model Tree sssssssseeessssssssssssceseesssssssssecceeessessnsssesseessessnsssssseeseessessss 106 Viewing Missing XRef Notification ICON cccssssessessscsssssscssssssssssncessessssscssscseececsacesscsscssseseesneess 106 Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree ss ssesssssssssssseseessssssssossceessessnsssssseecseosesssssseeseesssssss 107 Hiding Model PartSisissunineniennaa an nian am aca balou NARROS 107 S Erate SD IV LUIS EEE E EEA S E VE EN A ESA 107 Deleting Models from a Mockup scssssssssssssessssssessncsscsssssssssssstssussasssscescsssesssuscsscsnsencesscscsnseseasees 108 Manipulating Display of a 3D Model ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessesseseeseeseeseeseeeeeseeseesereeeeereeeeereeeeereesresees 109 Display ACCU UIC OS o oo teases iaee eesin aE E ER NASES a NE a e iaa iatea ei S 111
267. ssssecereeosossssseesreesresssssesse 127 Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z AXiS ccscsssessesssssssssscssssnsssssncsacssscsscssscssccuceacsascsscesseseeees 127 Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z AXIS sessessssssssseesssssessnssscsssssscsssssessucsaccassescssscsseascencensess 127 Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z AXiS c ccsscsssssesscsscssssseesussssssscsscessssscssssaesssceaceascescesseaeeaes 128 Transforming a 5 WIOCEl a canisaiente tat aiiana a AE NS 129 Transforming a Model Using Illustration BUttONS cssssessessssssssseecssssecsssssccsscesessecseesnsenseness 130 Resetting the Transformation Of a 3D Model ou eessessssssssssssessssssessncsscssscsessscstecscsasesscseesseseeess 130 Transforming a Model by Setting Values ssssssssecssecssccssesssscseecsscssecsuccesecsecssesseecsecessesseeeneess 131 SECRONING PAE dis cachu dur E AEE 132 Section Plane Options ssenari nR E A RR 132 CUC OO TOINS acc aneao nen ee es teed sce Seacrest ecu ence tec tuedl ccna sae do bee denea iuad 132 Defining the Section Plane and Cut through scsecssssssssesseessessessncsscssscsesssssssncsasessseeeesseseeens 133 5 40 fore AO EEE AE eee cana et eee en MRC ert cet ne I eri De DH Cee SUM NCR rT TC 134 Explode Opti ONS E AE EA RE E E A SE sents 134 Explodi ga s D Mode lisss n aS a AS E a A RICE arora Ee 135 Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model ssssssssesseeessssssssssseeeseessssssssseoceeesssssssseoseressessnssseseresees 135 Comp
268. stance measurement set the SHOW_POINTOPOINT_PAGE INI option Refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide for more information The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snap ping modes 240 Markups 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment connecting segment connecting segment connecting points the point and the the point and the the point and the line arc plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line and Distance between the plane NOTE The lines must the line and arc axis n be parallel NOTE The line must be parallel to the plane Arc Center Distance between Distance between the axes of the arcs the arc axis and the lane NOTE Arc planes P must be parallel NOTE The plane and the arc plane must be perpendicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE The planes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Distance i ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 3 Select the snapping modes that yo
269. state to when an entity was first created Opening an existing Markup file also restores the last saved view state From the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity that you want to view and select Go To NOTE Double clicking on a markup entity from the Markup Navigation tree also has the same result as the Go To feature AutoVue displays the markup page containing the entity 249 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES If you selected a markup entity that is on another page of the Markup file the page containing that entity will be displayed Selecting Markup Entities To select a markup entity click the markup entity s outer edge To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting The markup entity or entities are selected You can also select the markup entities from the Markup Navigation Tree To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting Moving a Markup Entity In the Markup Navigation Tree or in the workspace select the markup entity or entities that you want to move To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting In the workspace click and drag the selected markup entity or entities to anywhere in the workspace Transforming Markup Entities NOTE This menu option is only available for 2D and EDA files AutoVue provides the option to rotate markup entities Rotating a selected Markup Entity This featu
270. sub assemblies and parts are retrieved from correct paths For information on UNC file names and the server protocol refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide AutoVue provides the ability to compare two 3D files or two sets of entities from the same file or different files and display color coded comparative data Generally when comparing two files you should first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older version When comparing files AutoVue displays three windows e The right window displays the newer version of the document e The left window displays the older version of the document The bottom window displays the comparison results By default the result windows display added deleted and unchanged entities The Compare Tree displays the model s hierarchy with a State column displaying different icons representing the results of the file comparison The icons indicate if an model part has been added modified F moved amp or deleted In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three To access these options right click in any window and select an option from the pop up menu By default the Comparison Result window displays the unchanged deleted and added information NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison 136 WORKING WI
271. sure the distance between two points Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between two nets NOTE This option is only available for PCB files EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the available snapping modes Button Snap To Description S End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the entity s end point a Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear entity Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an entity lH Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin 93 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Le Button Snap To Description Via Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via iii Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a component Dx Free snap Allows
272. t select the layer set you want to display 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The selected layer set displays in the workspace 4 To restore the default layer set from the Layer Sets list select Default Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also view the layer sets from the Layers list beside the Layers button amp on the AutoVue toolbar Creating User Defined Layer Sets You can define a layer set and save it for the duration of the session The layer set you defined is added to the Layer Sets list in the Layers dialog and to the Layers list on the AutoVue toolbar By default the Top Bottom and Default layer sets and any other layer sets belonging to the file are listed in the Layer Sets list TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 75 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Layer Set dialog appears Enter the layer set name 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layer Sets list 5 To modify the attributes of the new layer set select one or more layers and change the Visibility Order or Color 6 Click Apply to save the changes and to display the new layer set in the workspace 7 To define more layer sets repeat steps 2 to 6 8 Click Close to close the Layers dialog
273. t the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality Oracle AutoVue Oracle AutoVue is a viewing and markup application that has been developed for both business and technical users AutoVue is capable of displaying hundreds of file formats without the authoring application Supported file types include Text Office Graphics EDA 2D Engineering Drawings and 3D Models Even contents of archive files can viewed in AutoVue NOTE Although not required we recommend that file names include their standard file extensions If the file extensions are not included AutoVue may require additional time to load a file Oracle AutoVue is available in various product variations Refer to the AutoVue Product Variations Feature Matrix chapter at the end of this document to see what features are available for each variation 14 INTRODUCTION MARKING UP DOCUMENTS Marking Up Documents AutoVue has the ability to create markups for all its readable file formats without the docu ment s authoring application AutoVue creates markups for different formats without modifying the original file You can attach comments notes and drawings to any file you display in AutoVue This is called marking up a file commonly known as annotating or redlining A markup is an object or entity that you attach to a file All markups are saved in a separate file called a Markup or a Markup file When you display a file with its markups the markups a
274. t you want to add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The height of the text box will adjust to accommodate the text To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OK to implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree To move the text box click and drag it Click and drag the frame handles of the text box to enlarge it ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace Hiding the box surrounding the text TASK 1 2 Select the text box entity From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attri butes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears
275. ter the file name or browse to locate the artwork file you want to compare with the PCB file 4 Click Open STEP RESULT The PCB Artwork Comparison dialog appears 5 From the box select the PCB Physical layer that represents the artwork ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example TOP or BOTTOM 6 Click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the original PCB drawing the second displaying the Artwork drawing and the third the Comparison Result window 7 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare RESULT The original file appears in the AutoVue workspace Generating Bill of Material BOM For EDA files you can obtain a list of the components and parts required for manufac turing the item featured in the schematic drawing or PCB design The Bill of Material BOM report produces a count of the unique components or parts needed for manufacturing It lists the quantity required component name reference desig nators value for resistors and capacitors size and descriptions When determining the 82 WORKING WITH EDA FILES GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL BOM uniqueness of a component the count considers only the attributes chosen for inclusion in the report output It includes only those attributes that provide the most accurate and unique component quantities TASK 1 From the An
276. the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Click Import STEP RESULT The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears 188 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES 3 4 Navigate to the markup file that you want to import and select it Click Open RESULT The imported Markup file appears in the workspace on top of the original file Exporting a Markup File To export a Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save As ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For a new Markup file you can also click Save Markup id STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 2 Click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Navigate to the location where you want to export the Markup file 4 Enter filename Click Save RESULT The Markup file is exported to the selected directory The default format saved is Markup Files but you can select another one In the Save as Type list there are six formats to choose from Markup Files DXF Output dfx AutoCAD DWG dwg Microstation DGN Output dgn 189 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Setting the Active Markup File A file can have several Markup files When you open several Markup files simultaneously you can set one as the active Markup file Any changes you make is applied to the current active markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIO
277. the Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 72 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS 3 Inthe Logical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description One logical layer Select the check box in the Visibility column ej Multiple logical layers To select more than one layer press the Shift or Control key while selecting and then click Visibility e 4 Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace 5 You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set 6 Click Close to close the Layers dialog Modifying Polarity From the Logical Layers section of the Layers dialog you can invert the polarity of the selected layer if polarity exists in the selected file TASK 1 Select the layer and then click the Polarity icon to toggle the polarity or select deselect the checkbox in the Polarity column When positive polarity is selected the layer appears as is When negative polarity is selected the layer image is inverted the entities in the layer are displayed as transparent and the remainder of the layer appears as a solid color Changing Layer Color You can modify the color of any physical or logical layer from the Layers dialog TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers Se STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2
278. the column or columns you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To show all columns click Show All To hide all columns click Hide All 59 WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPONENTS TAB 3 To change the column order select the column you want to move then click Move Up to move the column up in the list or click Move Down to move the column down in the list 4 To save the changes you made to the columns select Save column settings STEP RESULT The new column settings will be retained the next time the file is opened 5 Click OK RESULT The changes appear in the Navigation Panel Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components RefDes Compon Le a C345 CAP 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CAP 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 v ai gt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF lt 3 Gi gt Components Nets Bookmarks 60
279. the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note 236 Markups NESTING MARKUP ENTITIES Nesting Markup Entities You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other markup entites TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a file for example a Box entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Box entity 3 From the Markup menu select Note or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note amp or Hyperlink RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box parent entity 3D Specific Markups When marking up 3D files you can attach text or a note as well as create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 3D Markup Entities You can create many different types of markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The markup entities are Option Text Description Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text gaj See Adding Text Attachment Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment N i See Adding an Attachment 237 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARK
280. the results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears 10 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 11 Toview the properties of an entity select the entity from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entities Properties dialog appears and displays the properties for the selected entity 12 To show the net connectivity click the Attributes tab select the entity from the list then right click and select Show Net Connectivity STEP RESULT The net connectivity for the selected entity is highlighted in the workspace 13 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog 91 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Performing an Attribute based Search The following steps describe how to perform an attribute based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the Attributes tab From the Attributes list select an attribute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by Owner Type or Value click the column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT The Owner Type and Value of the selected attribute appear in the list If you w
281. the results in a file with the specified extension 7 Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog Design Verification Design verifications are operations that check the electrical design of a PCB against a set of rules defining physical and electrical design constraints Performing these checks prevent short circuits and process errors The types of design rules are as follows Clearances Electrical Manufacturing Design Rule Checks Design Rule Type Description The minimum spacing air gaps allowed between two sets of entities in the design These sets can belong to the same type of entity or to different types Targets certain properties of the nets Targets the physical properties of a particular entity For design rule checks that have values you can set the global unit of measurement The available design rule checks are 84 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Clearance Design Rule Check Minimum Clearance Pad gt Pad Description Specify the minimum distance between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers NOTE The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers Minimum Clearance Pad gt Trace Specify the minimum pad to trace clearance and pads on the same physical layer NOTE Only the pad outline is considered Does not take into account traces
282. ties of a selected part press the Shift key and select the part again STEP RESULT A pop up appears listing the parent entities of the selected part Select an entity from the pop up list The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree 3 To select a group of parts from the Edit menu select Select then click and drag the mouse around the parts RESULT The entities within the box are selected and highlighted in the Model Tree If the selected entity is hidden in the Model Tree the Model Tree expands to display the selected entity Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model Select a model part in the workspace or from the Model Tree Right click and select Select Identical Parts All identical parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree If there are no iden tical parts found a message appears indicating No identical parts found You can also select sub assemblies and Select Identical Parts to display all identical sub assemblies 103 WORKING WITH 3D FILES RE CENTERING Re Centering The Re center option repositions the model back to the center of the View window You can use a model part as a central reference point to reposition a model You can select several model parts to use as one collective central reference point Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part TASK 1 Select the model part or parts that you want to re center 2 From the View menu sel
283. ting a Symbol Library TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol The Symbols dialog appears ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol Click the Libraries tab From the Symbol Libraries list select the library that you want to delete Click Delete STEP RESULT The library disappears from the list and from the Symbol Library list under the Symbols tab Close the Symbols dialog 2D Specific Markups AutoVue provides a variety of user friendly markup options that you can use when marking up 2D files You can create entities such as arcs boxes circles clouds lines and polygons You can draw a leader with multi line segments and add text to it NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 2D Markup Entities You can create many different types of 2D markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The available 2D markup entities are listed in the following table 206 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Markup Entity Arc Entity Information Click and drag the mouse to draw an Arc From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc N Box Click and drag to draw a rectangle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Box 2 To draw a square instead of a rectangle press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag Cloud
284. tinue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 222 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click
285. tion yourself on a surface of the 3D model press the Alt key and double click a point on the surface For example to walk through a 3D model of a house you can Alt double click the landing in front of the door Once you are at your desired view point of the 3D model you can use the arrow keys or mouse to navigate through the model The following table lists the available keyboard mouse actions and their function Keyboard Action Up arrow Down arrow Mouse Action Click and drag up down or roll the mouse wheel forward and backward Function Move forward backward Left arrow Right arrow Click and drag left right Turn left right Alt Up arrow Alt Down arrow Alt drag up down or Mouse middle button click and drag up down Move up down Elevation Alt Left arrow Alt Right arrow Alt drag left right or Mouse middle button click and drag left right Side step left right Ctrl Up arrow Ctrl Down arrow Ctrl click and drag up down Look up down Ctrl Left arrow Ctrl Right arrow Ctrl click and drag left right Rotate Alt double click Places camera perpendicular to selected plane Adding Markups in Walkthrough Mode When walking through a 3D model you can add a Note markup entity 159 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH NOTE The Note markup entity is the only markup supported in Walkthrough mode T
286. tional movement along the three axes and the scaling up and down 129 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL Transforming a Model Using Illustration Buttons TASK 1 op O ND 10 11 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Transform w STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL NFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting If no part is selected transformation is applied to the entire model Use the rotate or translate buttons to transform the model To set the translate rotate and scale increments click Options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When you click a rotation translation or scale button the model transforms in increments of the values entered in the Options dialog STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears Enter the Translate Increment value in inches Enter the Rotate Increment value in degrees Enter the Scale Increment value Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Reset to set the model to its original transformation Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Sel
287. tity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the compare file 137 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 7 To compare the results of the entity in the newer file to the older file select the entity from tree then right click and select Compare Results STEP RESULT The Compare Results dialog appears 8 To view the attribute differences click Attributes 9 Toview the transformation difference click Transformation ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no attribute or transformation differences the buttons are disabled 10 Click OK to close the Compare Results dialog 11 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Exit Compare E7 RESULT The newer file appears in the workspace Comparing Entity Sets From the file comparison you can compare a set of entities from one file against a set of entities from the another file You can also compare sets of entities from the same file TASK 1 Select the files you want to compare 138 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare Sets Compare Sets STEP RESULT The Compare Sets dialog appears 5 3DCatiaSFrontDrive ssembly LATHA Page 1 5 Product 5 3DCatiaSB alanceS hafl 5 3DCatiaSB alanceS Solid 0 3DCatiaSPowerSteerin 3DCatiadPowerSte 3DCatia54C
288. tity or entities NOTE Any new markup line entities that you create will have the new arrow style Fill Type Change the transparency for selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill type To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type 261 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Fill Color Change the line color fill color and fill type for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill color To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer Z changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer Defining a Custom Color To define your own color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Fill Color list select
289. to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the model to define the angle If you selected a Plane click the vertex edge or face whose angle you want to measure between the plane ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appears indicating the angle The measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 8 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Are amp STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snap ping modes are displayed 243 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 11 12 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle If you selected From
290. to perform measurements in 3D files When measuring AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure 2 The following table outlines the available measuring options Angle Name Description Measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types 147 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Arc Name center point Description Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the Distance Measure the precise distance between any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Edge Length Measure the precise length of a edge Face Surface Measure the precise surface area Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the followin
291. toVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe 5 STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears 2 Click Add File In the Open dialog that appears select the same file then click Open 4 Inthe Cross Probe dialog click OK STEP RESULT The file appears in a new AutoVue window The views that display in each window depend on the contents of file you are cross probing 5 Ifthefile does not contain a schematic one window shows the 2 dimensional view of the PCB and the other shows the 3 dimensional view of the PCB 6 Ifthe file contains a schematic as well as a PCB the schematic view displays in one window and the 2D PCB view displays in the other window In this case take the following steps to see the 2D and 3D views of the PCB a In the window s dialog deselect the Automatic option b Select a different view from the TYPE list For example you can switch between Schematic and PCB 3D View 7 Select an entity in the 3D view RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the 2D view of this file NOTE You can select entities in the 2D view or 3D view of the file The selected entities are highlighted in both open views of this file 80 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing To display the net connectivity of the design when cross probing perform the following steps TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in any open file 2 Right click and select Show Net Conn
292. toVue toolbar you can also click Print A STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears nOA wo oN Click the Options tab Configure the print options Configure other print options To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 6 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Print Margins From the Margins tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the top bottom right and left margins for the printed file You can define Option Description Margins Set the value for the Left Top Right and Bottom margins 267 PRINTING PRINT MARGINS Option Description Minimum Set the acceptable minimum margins for the selected printer Units Specify the unit for the margins Override Select this option to override the predefined minimum print margins Printing Minimum Margins Setting the Margins TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Margins tab Enter the margin size that you want for Left Top Right and Bottom or click Minimum if you want to set the margins to the minimum acceptable for the selected printer To define margins that are less the minimum acceptable for the selected pr
293. tor Files sersenmennsnec na aeaa e east aoaea Ea ata 55 Calibrating an ArGe ina aa E EE ents div eed E at Nae 56 Working with EDA File S ij cssssissninieantienivarisiein hiiwesnisinduaniosubninenedndutaamnnahedwauniaidlh 58 Navigation Panel eeno ananin E a n E A EEA AEA An 58 G stomizing ColuUMN Ssss ennaa r a E A E eat S 59 Kolna eola al Ea F1 o E E E EA EE AOIS AEO ENE E S 60 NESET o EEEE REEE O T R AETA T 61 Bookmarks Tabaiise snena ane aane AE E O SAE NE EE EARR ia 62 S l cting ENTIE S mansn ccsvasenvisvachep E E E evveds sassvee Mase neS a EE nE a sdeineeaad atid ione 62 From the Navigation Panel ccsscssssssssessssssssssssessssssessucsacsssssscsusssessuseaccsscsscsuscsscsnseasessceecesseseescenses 63 FROME WORKS pac Enina ren e a SST a i E a AE E EEEE TE EN 63 From the Entity Search Dialog sinsero ER R ERA E 64 Zooming to a Selected Entity e eesesssessesesseeeeserserserserseeseeseesreereereerserseesseseessessnsssssnsssssnnns ensenen en esenee 64 Filtering Entity Ty DOS capsaccecs cscs ceca hseschcacaachasdetsovbvndcduscsdsuliessssae choucacdoessavaschunses n a a aa 65 Entity Propertie Sien menan AE a naa E A EA A a E R AA 65 Viewing the Properties of an ENtity cssscsscsscsscccsecssecssccssecssecssecssesssccsccesesssscsnccssccsecesseeseeeseeeses 66 Navigating Desig Hierarehyiux mercek E REN 69 Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy s esesserserserserserseesersreseeereseseessessessessessessnsssssnsssssensensenneeses
294. ttp www oracle com us products applications auto Vue index html Blog https blogs oracle com enterprisevisualization Sales Inquiries E mail autovuesales_ww oracle com Customer Support Web Site http www oracle com autovue index html 290 FEEDBACK CUSTOMER SUPPORT 291 Index Numerics 2D markup entities 206 markups 196 206 measuring 48 non vector angle 54 arc 55 area 52 calibrating distance 51 95 151 213 222 230 242 distance 50 snapping modes 49 220 vector angle 54 arc 55 area 52 calibrating arc 56 99 154 215 226 233 244 vector files distance 51 non vector markup measure entities 210 text search 32 vector files 37 analyzing 42 comparing 43 displaying layers 38 displaying xrefs 39 manipulate 37 overlay 40 modify 40 remove 41 selecting blocks 38 vector markup measure entities 219 viewing options 33 pan and zoom window 36 selecting views 42 specifying a view point 42 working with 2D files 32 292 3D 3D views 116 advanced 3D search 146 bill of material 140 Bookmarks tab 20 62 102 comparing files 136 137 138 coverting 279 display attributes 111 color 112 transparency 113 visibility 112 entity properties 120 entity search 141 143 attribute based search 144 save results 147 explode 134 135 options 134 save 135 files 100 global axes 102 light setting 113 ambient 114 directional 114 new light source 1
295. tween points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle amp STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points The snapping modes are displayed STEP RESULT The snapping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 4 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle If you selected Between 2 lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurement appears in the Measurement Enti ties dialog To change the size of the arc click and drag it to the desired size To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup 10 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 11 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 224
296. ty can be used as a Symbol it must be added to a Symbol Library You can create a Symbol Library and add Symbols to it You can also add or remove Symbols from existing libraries NOTE When a Symbol is created the graphic entity is converted to a Windows Metafile Format WMP As a result the resulting graphic in the Symbol may differ from the original image as it has been converted to another format In order to avoid these discrepancies in the output it is recommended to use AutoCAD formats as the graphical entity However you 1 In previous releases of AutoVue a Symbol markup entity was called a Stamp 203 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES may still use any 2D raster image as the graphical entity but differences between the Sybmol and native file should be expected TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol RA i STEP RESULT The Symbols dialog appears Symbols Libraries Symbol Library Baus Drag and drop symbol into Auto ue Draft APPROVED Scaling Isotropic Anisotropic Selected Symbol Source File Symbol Name Description 2 Click the Symbols tab 3 From the Symbol Library list select the library from which you want to select a Symbol STEP RESULT The Symbols appear for the selected library 4 Click Isotropic if you want to scale the Symbol
297. u selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted Click kad Second Set to select the entities that you want to measure to 6 Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color 7 From the Measured Min Distance list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 8 Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom in on the measured value on the drawing 9 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is high lighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurement Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 234 MARKUPS ADDING TEXT Adding Text With AutoVue you can add a text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text AL Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box Click in the text box and enter the tex
298. u want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 4 Onthe model select the entity you want to measure from ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select the Fix Position check box STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the From lad field 5 Click inside the To lad field to select the entity type that you want to measure to 241 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 On the model select the entity you want to measure to STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the To lad field 8 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path appears in a value box entity on the current active markup The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Drag to move the measured line path 10 Click on the measured line path 11 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 12 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 13 Click Close to close
299. ue or its Associated Application Editing an Attachment TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree right click the attachment and select Edit or double click the markup entity STEP RESULT The Attach File dialog appears 2 Make your changes and click to OK STEP RESULT The dialog closes and modifications are implemented Adding a Hyperlink A hyperlink is a link between the current file and a new file a third party software applic aiton or a Web page URL You can create hyperlinks in your current file so that your outside files software applications and Web pages only a click away The main benefit of adding hyperlinks is that the files are accessible from one location but the information is referenced not duplicated This ensures a manageable file size when loading If changes need to be made to a linked file they need to be done in one location the linked file itself Creating a Hyperlink TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink Yo 198 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 2 Click a point on the document where you want to place the hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Establish HyperLink Link Name Description URL Open in a new applet window Enter a Link Name 4 Optionally enter a Description Type the URL or click Br
300. ulating EDA VIEWS aroni rai E A E AE E EEN 77 3D MEOW safes tosaucissesacasaae ations ew pv ean ates vale seein ae aon 78 Cross PPE COMING ses v ssa ven seyeedcas gases n a a e aa A Ee A AE aba S Eea 78 Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files sssssssssesssesssssssseccseessssssssooseeesssssnsssesseeeseesnssssss 78 Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File ssesssssssssssseeessssssssessceesesssssssss 80 Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing sssessssresersersesserserserseeseesrssrseesssssssessssss 81 Zooming when Cross Probing ses sssseeessessssssssseeeseesssssssssoeseessssssssseoseressessnsssessteserosnsssssseeeeressesssssseeree 81 Comparing a PCB with ArtWork esssssssssssseeeseesssssssseeeseessssssssseceeeesssssnsseeseeeosesnssssessereseeonsssssseeeseessesssssseerre 82 Generating Bill of Material BOM ssssssssseeessssssssessceeseessssssssseeceeesnssnssseoseeessessssssesseresessssssssseeeseesssssssseesree 82 De sign VEFRCAtiOn scsniesssiscsianrieroniennoneniaicun nam SEP ESEN COSE SKKN ES EnS 84 Design R le CHECKS iginn ennonn enin EE A NAA E a R 84 Verifying a Designan bene nace sani eevee eel aaa ai 88 Exporting the Design Verification Results c essesssssesssscseessscsessnsssessscstesnscsessncsascsscsscssseseesncenses 89 Searching Using Entity Search 4x sis cusasinuis chess nine E N AA N S 90 Performing an Entity Type based Search ssssssscsssssscsscccscsssccssesssessscs
301. ult setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Setting Directional Lighting Setting the directional lighting adjusts the position of the light source on the model You can also add a new light source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 114 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS To change the direction of the light click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag the white ball outside of the large ball STEP RESULT The direction of the light reflected on the 3D model automatically changes with the movement of the white ball The Custom option is selected when you adjust the position of the light To set the light direction to its default setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Adding a New Light Source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 Select the Two lights option STEP RESULT A new light source appears as a black ball in the 5 o clock position 3 Toadd more light sources right click inside the square surrounding the ball and select Create New Light Source from the pop up menu STEP RESULT The Custom option is selected and the new light source appears as a white ball 4 Click and drag the small
302. up Entity Properties Dialog sssssssscssecsecnsessscsssesseessecsscessesseecssesseesneenseeseecses 258 PAI VOM N Govt voces A AE SEE AE EE A EEE ETEEN 264 Print OD tiOMS ecscorcccscceus sco cuiers caressa A a a A Aa a T To eN iS 264 Configuring the Print Options eessssssssssseeesssssssssesseecseesssssssssesseeessesnsssessteeseessnsssssseeereosesssssseesteroresssssesse 267 Print Margins isto ceo ene ea siinne as an abel Beals ae ieiet iaiia aiaiai aak 267 Setting the Margin Sansenennna nnani R E A sinini 268 Ga cle ty RO OCGN isin i aa a eea aieeaa eoni eE eE aE oae Ea EE NEK S Sa E R i aai 269 Adding a Header and FOOLER sesssssssssssseeessesssssssstecseesnsssssseeceeessessnsssessteeseeonssssessteeeresrsssssseeereeerssss 270 Native Print Setting Sreser onanirao eissai eonia a iaaa EaR a airnn 270 Watermark sess n n TA cheat cla A A A E O A RSE 271 Addi g a Watermark a ssseinutssidssathscatiensiniernnundnioanuannomodabbimnemnauies 272 ASSIGNING Pern SOttINGS ss ccsacccacentiesaraeechecsensanseauestscoatecenipuseaseaniagd eeu eee 273 Creating a New Pen Setting 4 ca cx econ cha a ees oe Lhe SG ead 273 Deleting a Pen SEttiNg anien Ni E EE SE ES EESE EEE SEES ES 274 Partial Preview ofa Fienna a tas ected alld laa adn Ae ee alae cele 274 Previewing a File BETOre PRINTING sessiossa estoit sira esT isas 275 Printing a ail eerereeer etter tren conte nn A N N EAR ROS 275 Bethy Prentiss assssssassevssestuastcerioanrsnietsosicranaie
303. ured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Minimum Distance Use the Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between entities The available entities for snapping are nets pins vias and traces 233 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES NOTE To measure the minimum distance between entities on separate layers select Across Layers If a physical layer does not exist this option determines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click bad First Set to select the entities that you want to measure from 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select Net you cannot select any other type of entity 4 Click the first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities yo
304. urement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 From the Angle Definition section select one of the following From 3 Points Measure the angle between three points Between 2 Lines Measure the angle between two non parallel lines 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes Select Between 2 Lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 97 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle 8 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define or select an arc in the drawing and measure its arc length start and end of angle sweep radius center and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure b STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc
305. utes The Attributes tab displays a model or model part s attributes The list of attributes varies depending on the model Some of the viewable General attributes are as follows Attribute Description Color Color of the selected model part Density The density of the model or selected model parts Name The model part name or the displayed page name of the model Render Mode The dynamic rendering used for displaying model or model part For example Shaded Shaded Wire and Wireframe Transparency The value between 0 and 1 representing the model or model part s degree of transparency 0 opaque 1 transparent Visibility The value True visible or False invisible for a model or model part If you are displaying the 3D view of an EDA design AutoVue displays the general attributes mentioned above In addition AutoVue displays attributes specific to the Printed Circuit Board PCB such as component name board side component class and device type Ifa 3D file has Product and Manufacturing Information PMI anda PMI entity is selected the PMI attributes are displayed along with the above general attributes Some of the view able PMI attributes are X Axis Y Axis font color text font name and tolerance type Viewing Attributes TASK 1 To view the attributes of specific model parts select the parts from the model 2 Toviewthe attributes of the entire 3D model make sure that no parts are selected 120 WORKI
306. vencteavenvecnnentuanetevensti er aia near aE R 186 Entering Markup Information sessssssssessseesssssssssssseeeseesssssssseeeseesssssssssesseeessesnssssessteeseesnsssssseeeereressss 186 Saving a New Markup File sessssssssesssessssssssseeseesssssnssseeseesssessnsssssseecsessosssssseosressssssnsssessreserssnsssesstesees 187 Opening Markup FIlGS icsssssassiicescnnsdedemnnedivn acansejieseadeatnd n aaas 187 Saving an Existing Markup File sessssssssssesseessssssssseeseeeseessnsssssceeseessossssseooceeesssssnsssoseresrrssnsssesseesres 188 Nia OETA sek PAAR pF IL sass svssis clos ca lesb cnn serscanisnavta cossins coins eE taste cesdaasaetv conan sap maasecasnaraansaans 188 Exporting a Markup File esssssssessseesssssssseesseesssssssssessceeseesnsssesseeeseessssssssseeseeessesnssssessteesessnsssssseeeeesressss 189 Setting the Active Markup File esssssssssesseesssssssssoeseeeseesssssssseecseessssssssseoseesssossnsssessressessnssessseesres 190 Changing the Active Markup File sessssssssssseessssssssseeseeeseesnsssssscecseessnssnssseeseeessssssssesseressessnsssesseesees 190 Working with Markup Layers sssssssessssssssssssesessessesseseoseeeeeseeeeesereeesereeeeereeeeeeeeeereereereeresrssessnssessessessnsssssssss 191 Creating a Markup Layer sssesersersesserserserseeseesrssesressesressssseseessessrssessssssssssssssesesssessesseneeneenesseesees teette 191 Setting the Active Markup Layer sesscssscssscssecssecssccssecssess
307. ver Refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide for information on setting up server directories TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File eX STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 26 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 2 From the left panel click Server ti ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Files located in the server are displayed in the dialog 3 Select a file and click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a File from a Backend DMS System When AutoVue is connected to a backend Document Management System DMS system you can open a file located in the system from the File Open dialog Depending on the backend DMS system you are connected to you must enter your username and pass word when opening files stored in the backend system Refer to your integration documentation for more information on logging onto your DMS system TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To open a file from the backend DMS system from the left panel click DMS i ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If AutoVue is configured with one DMS system the name of the DMS would appear instead of DMS If AutoVue is connected to multiple backend DMS systems a list of the DMS system names appear when you click DMS Ff Select the DMS from which you want to open files STEP RESULT An authentication di
308. which you want the Model Tree to display when opening a 3D file The default level is 3 Alternately select Expand On Demand to the collapse the whole tree Manipulator Enable the Align with current UCS option to automatically align the manipulators with the current User defined Coordinate System Selection The following Selection options let you define how AutoVue indicates that an object is selected Option Description Highlight Bounding Box Selection is enclosed in a wireframe box Highlight Entity Selection is indicated by changing color Walkthrough The following Walkthrough options let you configure the view to use when you enter walk through mode and to control whether or not you want to see the Walkthrough dialog at startup Option Description Restore Last View Select this option to save the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Show Walkthrough dialogon Select this option if you want the Walkthrough dialog to display when startup you start walkthrough mode Clear this option if you do not want to see the Walkthrough dialog on startup 175 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files There are configuration options that allow you to customize your work environment when working with EDA files To access the EDA configuration options fr
309. ws saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements All the information is obtained by AutoVue by referencing various sources either internal files or external reference files that are located outside the file In addition to the features mentioned this chapter provides detailed information on how you can modify AutoVue to suit your needs and preferences through a broad range of configuration options Searching Text You can perform a text search on 2D vector and text based documents AutoVue provides search options that you can use to customize a search These options are as follows NOTE You cannot perform a text search on raster files 32 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Option Description Match Whole Word Only Match a complete word Match Case Search for a word or text string with specific capitalization Up Search backward in the document Down Search forward in the document TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Find Text STEP RESULT The Find dialog appears 2 Enter the word or phrase that you want to find in the Find What field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are searching in a vector file select a text string from the list You can refine your search by selecting Match Whole Word Only or Match Case 4 Click Find Next STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the text and zooms into the text area For PDF files AutoVue highlights the te
310. xt but maintains the current zoom level 5 Click Close to close the Find dialog 2D Viewing Options From the View menu you can change how the active file is displayed in the workspace For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise You can access these options from the View menu The options are 33 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Sub Menu Description Zoom Zoom Box Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar you in work space and select from pop up menu Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q i Zoom Previous Reverts to the previous zoom level From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Q NOTE You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Previous Full Resolution Display the file at full resolution From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Q 34 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Fit Horizontal Sub Menu Description Fit the image horizontally in the active window The vertical dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window NOTE You can als
311. yer Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog Defining a Custom Line Color To define a custom line color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Color list select Custom Color T STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears Select a color and click OK Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION f you selected markup entities prior to specifying a custom color only the selected entities will have the new line color To apply the new line color to any new markup entity you create make sure no markup entity is selected before opening the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities Line Style Change the line style for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity you want to change the line style To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting From the Line Style list select the required line style 259 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line style RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities Line Thickness Change the line thickness for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity fo
312. yer as the active markup layer When a markup layer is active all modifications you make are applied to that markup layer There are two ways in which to set a layer as active TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 You can perform one of the following From the Markup Layers list select the layer you want to make active and click Set Active From the Currently Active Layer list select the layer you want to make active 3 Click OK Changing the Color of a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to change the color of its markup enti ties TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer whose color you want to change 3 Click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears 4 Select a Color 192 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only the entities that were created with the BylayerS color defined in the Markup Layers dialog will change color Any entities that were created using the color options from the Markup Properties toolbar will override the Bylayer Z color and will not change Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Renaming a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to rename the layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu
313. yers list select the markup layer you want to delete Click Delete 4 Click OK RESULT The layer or layers are deleted along their associated entities Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Once you create a markup entity it is possible to assign it to a pre existing markup layer TASK 1 2 Select the markup entity or entities that you want to move From the Markup menu select Format and then select Move to Layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the markup entity select Format and then select Move to Layer STEP RESULT The Move to Layer dialog appears 194 MARKUPS CONSOLIDATING MARKUP FILES 3 From the Layers list select the destination layer 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities are moved to the selected layer Only markup entities using the ByLayer color will change to the new layer s color See Also Working with Markup Entities Consolidating Markup Files The Consolidate option allows you to create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files During the review cycle consolidation simplifies document revisions by providing the author with one combined Markup file instead of several Markup files Note that the Consolidate option is only active when more than one Markup file is opened TASK 1 Open the Markup files that you want to consolidate 2 From the Markup menu select Consolidate
314. you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 99 Working with 3D Files From AutoVue s 3D mode you have many ways in which to manipulate the model For example you can select model parts to transform independently from the rest of the model as well as modify the selected model part s visibility and attributes 3D mode also gives you the ability to perform an entity search and compute mass properties and it allows you to import 3D models into the current window and export files to other formats Additionally the Global Axes inform you of where the X Y and Z axes are positioned throughout all the operations you perform in AutoVue The Perspective option shows objects in three dimension with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth You have lighting options where you can adjust the overall lighting surrounding a model or just its source light You can also customize operations to suit your needs For example you can create and save your own views Define cross sections and cut throughs of 3D models There are also features like Bill of Material BOM and Product and Manufacturing Infor mation PMI Filtering Models Tab and Model

User`s Manual (English)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents